GE Appliances – UseManuals https://usemanuals.com Owner's manuals for all sorts of products Sat, 01 Jul 2023 16:47:17 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2 https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/02/favicon-32x32-2.png GE Appliances – UseManuals https://usemanuals.com 32 32 GE Front Load Washer/Dryer GFQ14 User Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/gfq14-front-load-washer-dryer/ Mon, 21 Nov 2022 11:25:45 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=7063 Read More...

]]>

GE Front Load Steam Washer & Condenser Dryer Combination GFQ14 User Manual

THANK YOU FOR MAKING GE APPLIANCES A PART OF YOUR HOME. Whether you grew up with GE Appliances, or this is your first, we’re happy to have you in the family.We take pride in the craftsmanship, innovation, and design that goes into every GE Appliances product, and we think you will too. Among other things, registration of your appliance ensures that we can deliver important product information and warranty details when you need them. Register your GE appliance now online. Helpful websites and phone numbers are available in the Consumer Support section of this Owner’s Manual. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration card included in the packing material.

Introduction

  •  This unit allows: wash only; dry only; wash and dry cycles.
  •  Fill the drum 2/3 full with laundry for best wash and dry performance. This allows air movement and proper drying. A fully loaded drum will lead to longer dry times.
    NOTE:
    During Dry cycles temperatures in the unit can get very hot. For this reason, the door will lock during the dry cycle and remain locked, after pausing or at the end of the cycle, until temperatures cool down. Forcing the door open will result in a broken door mechanism.
  •  This unit uses condenser drying technology. This enables installation and use without a vent, but loads take approximately 1.5 times longer to dry than a traditional vented dryer.

WARNING

  • To reduce the risk of death, fire, explosion, electric shock, or injury to persons when using your appliance, follow basic precautions, including the following:
  •  Read all instructions before using the appliance.
    Follow all fabric care instructions and warnings to prevent melting of garments or damage to the appliance.
  • DO NOT wash or dry articles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in or spotted with gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances, as they give off vapors that could ignite or explode.
  •  DO NOT add gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances to the wash water.
    These substances give off vapors that could ignite or explode.
  •  DO NOT place items exposed to cooking oils in your unit. Items contaminated with cooking oils may contribute to a chemical reaction that could cause a load to catch fire. To reduce the risk of fire due to contaminated loads, the final part of the tumble dryer cycle occurs without heat (cool down period). At the end of the cycle the door remains locked during the cool-down period to protect from surfaces that get hot during drying. The cool down period will be approximately 10 minutes before the door is unlocked.
  •  DO NOT dry articles containing foam rubber or similarly textured rubber-like materials.
    DO NOT store combustible materials, gasoline or other flammable liquids near the unit. Keep area around the air intake vent on the front of the unit and adjacent surrounding areas free from the accumulation of lint, dust, and dirt.
  •  The interior of the appliance should be cleaned periodically by qualified service personnel.
    DO NOT add dryer lint sheet in the unit when washing.
  •  DO NOT spray any type of aerosol into, on or near the unit at any time. DO NOT use any type of spray
    cleaner when cleaning the interior. Hazardous fumes or electrical shock could occur.
  •  Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot-water system that has not been used for 2 weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using a washing machine, turn on all hot-water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. As the gas is flammable, DO NOT smoke or use an open flame during this time.
  •  DO NOT allow children to play on or in this appliance. Close supervision of children is necessary when this appliance is used near children. Before the appliance is removed from service or discarded, remove the door or lid. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or injury to persons.
  •  DO NOT reach into the appliance if the drum is moving to prevent accidental entanglement.
  •  DO NOT install or store this appliance where it will be exposed to the weather.
  •  DO NOT tamper with controls, repair or replace any part of this appliance or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in the user maintenance instructions or in published user repair instructions that you understand and have the skills to carry out.
  •  DO NOT climb or stand on this unit.
  •  DO NOT operate this appliance if it is damaged, malfunctioning, partially disassembled or has missing or broken parts including a damaged cord or plug.
    Unplug the appliance or turn off the circuit breaker before servicing. Pressing the Power button
  • DOES NOT disconnect power. See “ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS” located in the Installation Instructions for grounding instructions.

PROPER INSTALLATION

This unit must be properly installed and located in accordance with the Installation Instructions before it is used. Ensure that the hot water hose is connected to the “H” valve and the cold water hose is connected to the “C”
valve.

  •  Install or store where it will not be exposed to temperatures below freezing or exposed to the weather, which could cause permanent damage and invalidate the warranty.
  •  Properly ground unit to conform with all governing codes and ordinances. Follow details in the Installation Instructions.
  •  Ensure unit is properly leveled and unit legs are adjusted such that unit is stable.
  •  GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of factory-specified parts. A list of factory hoses available for purchase are listed. These hoses are manufactured and tested to meet GE Appliances specifications.
  •  GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of new water supply hoses. Hoses degrade over time and need

WHEN NOT IN USE

  • Turn off water faucets to minimize leakage if a break or rupture should occur. Check the condition of the fill hoses; GE Appliances recommends changing the hoses every 5 years.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Order online at GEApplianceparts.com today, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours. In Canada, visit your local GE Appliances parts distributor or call 800.661.1616 or GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories.

Part Number Accessory

  • PM14X10002 4 ft rubber water supply hoses
  • PM14X10005  4 ft braided water supply hoses
  • GFA140SS 24” Front-load
  •  To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons, read the IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION before operating this appliance. riser – ADA compliant with a plumbable drip pan

Getting started

Introduction

  •  This unit allows: wash only; dry only; wash and dry cycles.
  •  Fill the drum 2/3 full with laundry for best wash and dry performance. This allows air movement and proper drying. A fully loaded drum will lead to longer dry times.
    NOTE:
    During Dry cycles temperatures in the unit can get very hot. For this reason, the door will lock during the dry cycle and remain locked, after pausing or at the end of the cycle, until temperatures cool down. Forcing the door open will result in a broken door mechanism.
  •  This unit uses condenser drying technology. This enables installation and use without a vent, but loads take approximately 1.5 times longer to dry than a traditional vented dryer. Throughout this manual, features and appearance may vary from your model.
  •  Add fabric softener to the fabric softener dispenser; see page 14.
  •  Add the manufacturer’s recommended amount of detergent. GE Appliances recommends the use of High-Efficiency detergents such as in your energy-efficient unit. Place detergent pods in the bottom of the wash basket before adding
  •  Loosely add items. Overloading may negatively impact wash and dry performance. See page 15 for suggested loading examples.
  •  Close door.
    NOTE:
    The unit will not start with the door open.
  • If the screen is dark, press the Power button to “wake up” the display.
  • Select a wash cycle. (Defaults are set for each wash cycle. These default settings can be changed. See Control settings for more information.)
    The unit can be used as a dryer only by turning the selector knob to one of the red dry cycles.
  •  Set the dry cycle by pressing the Dry pad. The unit will automatically run Auto
  • Dry after the wash cycle is complete.
  • Set Dry pad to Off to run a wash-only cycle.
  • Press the Start/Pause button.

Controls

Display and Status Lights
The display shows cycle status (WASH SPIN DRY COOL ), the Estimated Time Remaining until the end of the  cycle and the options selected. In addition, the display will show:

NOTE:
If an out-of-balance condition is detected by the unit, the SPIN light will blink during the remaining portion of the cycle and will stay illuminated for a short time after cycle completion. When this occurs, the unit is taking action to correct the out-of-balance condition and complete the cycle normally. In some cases, the unit may not be able to balance the load and spin up to full speed. Run a Spin Only cycle.

A Power
Press to “wake up” the display. If the display is active, press to put the unit into standby mode.
NOTE:
Pressing Power does not disconnect the appliance from the power supply.

Cycles – Wash, Soak, Spin and Clean
The cycles are optimized for specific types of loads. The chart below will help you match the setting with the loads. The Gentle Wash™ lifters lightly tumble the clothes into the water and detergent solution to clean the load.

Items to Wash Cycle Soil Level Wash Temp Spin Selection Dry Options Available Cycle Details
Cycle for normal, regular, or typical use for washing up to a full load of normally soiled cotton clothing. Normal Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium No Spin Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay Cycle for normal, regular, or typical use for washing up to a full load of normally soiled cotton clothing. Choose the Heavy or Extra Heavy soil level selection and Warm or Hot water temperature

selection as appropriate for your clothes load

for a higher degree of cleaning.

Lingerie and special care fabrics with light soil. Delicates Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Warm Cool Cold High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble

Delay

For lighty soiled items labeled hand-washable. Provides gentle tumbling and soak during wash and rinse.
Casual clothes, lightly soiled office wear. Casuals Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble

Delay

Wash cycle tailored to care for casual clothes and office wear items.
Whites and household linens. Whites Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble

Delay

Cycle tailored to clean and brighten your whites.
Sturdy fabrics with heavy to medium soil. Heavy Duty Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay Incorporates multi-step wash and soak periods combined with extended wash periods to effectively clean heavily to medium soiled sturdy fabrics.
Small loads of lightly soiled items that are needed in a hurry. Quick Wash Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay For cleaning lightly soiled loads in the fastest time possible. Cycle time

is approximately 33 minutes, depending on selected options.

Cycle for heavily soiled colorfast laundry. Stain Wash with Steam Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Time Saver Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay Add steam to the unit to assist with stain removal for heavily soiled colorfast laundry.
Items to Wash Cycle Soil Level Wash Temp Spin Selection Dry Options Available Cycle Details
Heavily soiled colorfast items with the need for sanitization. Sanitize Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Ex. Hot Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay Use this cycle to eliminate 99.9% of bacteria from fabrics. Cycle uses an increased water temperature and a longer wash cycle to provide the sanitization benefit. A longer rinse is incorporated to remove contaminates. For best results, select the Extra Heavy soil selection if available. See NOTE below.
Use to soak clothes. Soak Ex. Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Ex. Light

Ex. Hot Hot Warm Cool Cold Time Saver Extended Tumble The basket will fill with water to soak and gently agitate the load. At the end of the cycle the remaining water will be drained.
For items that need only to be rinsed, use this cycle. Rinse + Spin Max High Medium Low

No Spin

Off Tumble Low Normal Extra Rinse Extended Tumble Delay To quickly rinse and spin out any items at any time. Utilizes a high speed spin to extract water from wet items. To achieve a drain and spin, delselect the Extra Rinse option. This cycle will dispense prewash detergent and fabric softener.
Use to spin dry clothes that have already been Spin Only Max High Medium Off Tumble Low Delay Utilizes a high-speed spin to extract water from wet items.
washed. Low

No Spin

Normal
Cleaning the Tub Delay Recommended use
tub of residue Clean of at least once per
and odor. No month to clean the
clothes to be basket of residue
washed using and odor. Never load
this cycle. laundry when using
this cycle; laundry may
become damaged.
Cycle incorporates a
hot extended wash,
intense agitation action
and a flush out of the
pump.

NOTE:
The Sanitize cycle water temperatures CANNOT be changed. The Sanitize cycle is certified by NSF International, an independent third-party testing and certification organization.
The Sanitize certification verifies that the cycle reduced 99.9% of bacteria typically found in the residential laundry and that no significant contamination is transferred to subsequent washer loads. Only the Sanitize cycle has been designed to meet the requirements of NSF Protocol P172 for sanitizing effectiveness.

Cycles – Dry
The cycles are optimized for specific types of loads. The chart below will help you match the setting with the loads.

Items to Dry Cycle Soil Level Wash Temp Spin Selection Dry Options Available Cycle Details
Use to dry clothes for a specific amount of time. Timed Dry Tumble Low Normal Extended Tumble

Delay

1.  Once the Timed Dry cycle is selected, press the arrow pads to increase or decrease the dry time.

2.  Select the dry Temp.

3.  Close the door.

4.  Press Start/Pause.

Use for drying heavy-duty fabrics or items that should be very dry, such as towels. Auto Extra Dry Tumble Low Normal Extended Tumble

Delay

The sensor continuously monitors the amount of moisture in the load by detecting temperature in the drum. The cycle ends when the moisture reaches the selected dry level.
Use for normal dryness level suitable for most loads. This is the preferred cycle for energy saving. Auto Dry Tumble Low Normal Extended Tumble

Delay

The sensor continuously monitors the amount of moisture in the load by detecting temperature in the drum. The cycle ends when the moisture reaches the selected dry level.
For leaving items partially damp. Auto Damp Dry Tumble Low Normal Extended Tumble

Delay

The sensor continuously monitors the amount of moisture in the load by detecting temperature in the drum. The cycle ends when the moisture reaches the selected dry level.

Soil
Changing the Soil level increases or decreases the wash time to remove different amounts of soil.
To change the Soil level, press the Soil level pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between Extra Light, Light, Normal, Heavy or Extra Heavy soil.

Temp
Adjust to select the proper water temperature for the wash cycle. The rinse water is always cold to help reduce energy usage and reduce setting of stains and wrinkles.Follow the fabric manufacturer’s care label when selecting the wash temperature.To change the wash temperature, press the Temp pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between Cold, Cool, Warm, Hot or Extra Hot.

Spin
Changing the Spin setting changes the final spin speed of the cycles. Always follow the garment manufacturer’s care label when changing the Spin setting.To change the Spin setting, press the Spin setting pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between No Spin, Low, Medium, High or Max. Higher spin speeds are not available on certain cycles, such as Delicates.Higher spin speeds remove more water from the clothes and will help reduce dry time, but may also increase the possibility of setting wrinkles on some fabrics.

Dry
Changing Dry will change the temperature for your dry cycle:

Normal For regular to heavy cottons, synthetics, blends, and items labeled permanent press.
Low For delicates, synthetics, and items labeled Tumble Dry Low.
Tumble Items are continuously tumbled without heat.
Off Unit will skip dry cycle and wash only.

Options
Press to select your desired options:

Time Saver Choose your own timing and save it for the chosen cycle.
Extra Rinse Extra rinse is the extra wash before the main wash. Use it for heavily soiled clothes or for clothes with a care label that recommends prewashing before washing. Be sure to add liquid or powder high-efficiency detergent, or the proper wash additive, to the prewash dispenser.
Ex Tumble Add more tumbling time by selecting this option.

Delay Wash
Use to delay the start of your unit.

  1.  Choose your wash cycle and any options.
  2.  Press Delay Wash pad. You can change the delay time in 1-hour increments (up to 24 hours) each time you press the Delay Wash pad. Stop pressing the pad when your desired time is displayed.
  3.  Press the Start/Pause button to start the countdown.The countdown time will be shown in the Est Time Remaining (Estimated Time Remaining) display.
    NOTES:

    •  If the door is opened while the unit is in Delay Wash, the countdown time will stop the count down and the display will show “door”. The door must be closed and the Start/Pause button must be pressed to continue the delay time count down.
    •  You can delay the start of a wash cycle up to 24 hours.
    • the light on the pad will light up when Delay Wash is on.

Start/Pause
Press to start a wash cycle. If the unit is running, pressing it once will pause the unit and unlock the door. This function can be used to add garments during a cycle. Press again to restart the wash cycle.
NOTE:
If the unit is paused and the cycle is not restarted within 15 minutes, the current wash cycle will be canceled.
NOTE:
In some cases the unit will drain first, then unlock the door when it is paused.
NOTE:
The unit performs automatic system checks after pressing the Start/Pause button. Water will flow in 45 seconds or less. You may hear the door lock and unlock before water flows; this is normal.

Lock
You can lock the controls to prevent any selections from being made. Or you can lock or unlock the controls after you have started a cycle.Children cannot accidentally start the unit by touching pads with this option selected.To lock the unit, press and hold the Soil and Temp pads together for 3 seconds.To unlock the unit controls, press and hold the Soil and Temp pads together for 3 seconds. A sound is made to indicate the lock/unlock status.The control lock icon on the display will light up when it is on.
NOTE:
The Power button can still be used when the unit is locked.

Signal
When the light is on, the unit will beep at the end of the cycle and every time you press a pad on the control panel.
To turn the signal off, press and hold the Temp and Spin pads together for 3 seconds. A sound is made to indicate the lock/unlock status.

Add Dry Time
Press the up and down arrow pads to increase or decrease the Dry cycle time as desired.

Dispenser Drawer
Slowly open the dispenser drawer by pulling it out until it stops.After adding laundry products, slowly close the dispenser drawer. Closing the drawer too quickly could result in early dispensing of the fabric softener or detergent.
You may see water in the fabric softener compartment at the end of the cycle. This is a result of the flushing/siphoning action and is part of the normal operation of the unit.

Detergent Compartment

  •  Only use high-efficiency detergent in this unit. Use the detergent manufacturer’s recommended amount. DO NOT fill above the MAX line.
  •  Detergent is flushed from the dispenser at the beginning of the wash cycle. Either powdered or liquid high-efficiency detergent can be used.
  •  Detergent usage may need to be adjusted for water temperature, water hardness, size and soil level of the load. Avoid using too much detergent in your unit since it can lead to oversudsing and detergent residue being left on the clothes.

Divider Drawer System
The detergent compartment is in the front left of the dispenser drawer.

  • Powder Detergent – Lock the detergent card flat into its top position in the compartment. Make sure the card is locked, then pour the suggested amount of powder detergent into the detergent dispenser.
  • Liquid Detergent – Lock the detergent card vertically into its center position in the compartment. Make sure the card is locked, then pour the suggested amount of liquid detergent into the detergent dispenser.

Fabric Softener Compartment
If desired, pour the recommended amount of liquid fabric softener into the compartment labeled “Fabric Softener.” Use only liquid fabric softener in the dispenser.Dilute with water to the maximum fill line.Do not exceed the maximum fill line. Overfilling can cause early dispensing of the fabric softener, which could stain clothes.
NOTE:
Do not pour fabric softener directly on the wash load.

Loading

Always follow fabric manufacturer’s care label when laundering.

Sorting and Loading
Sort by color (whites, lights, colors), soil level, fabric type (sturdy cottons, easy care, delicates) and whether the fabric produces lint (terry cloth, chenille) or collects lint (velveteen, corduroy). Wash lint producers such as cotton towels and socks separate from lint collectors including synthetic garments and dress pants.

  • DO NOT wash fabrics soiled with flammable liquids or cleaning solvents.
  • No washer can completely remove oil.
  • DO NOT wash or dry anything that has been soaked in or spotted with any type of oil (including cooking oils). DO NOT reach into the unit until all moving parts have stopped.
  • Keep flammable materials and vapors, such as gasoline, away from the unit.
  • Items containing foam, rubber, or plastic must be dried on a clothesline.
  • Failure to do so can result in death, explosion, fire or amputation.

Loading to Wash
The drum may be fully loaded with loosely added items.To add items after the unit has started, press Start/Pause and wait until the door is unlatched. The unit may take up to 30 seconds to unlock the door after pressing Start/Pause, depending on the machine conditions. Do not try to force open the door when it is locked. After the door unlocks, open gently. Add items, close the door and press Start/Pause to restart.

Loading Examples

WORKWEAR LINENS MIXED LOAD DELICATES* QUICK WASH (2–3 GARMENTS)
3 Jeans

3 Work Wear Shirts

2 Work Wear Pants

1 Bath Sheet

6 Bath Towels/

8 Washcloths

4 Hand Towels/

1 Terrycloth Bath Mat

OR

1 Flat Queen-Sized

Sheet

1 Fitted Queen-Sized Sheet

2

Pillowcases

2 Pillowcases

1 Hand Towel

1 Flat Sheet/

1  Fitted Sheet

2  Bath Towels/

2 Washcloths

OR

4 Shirts (Men’s or Women’s)

3 Pair Pants (Khakis or Twills)

3 T-shirts

4 Pairs of Boxers 2 Pairs of Shorts OR

4 T-shirts

2 Pairs of Sweatpants 2 Sweatshirts

1 Hoodie

5 Pairs of Socks

4 Bras

4 panties

2 Slips

1 Camisole

3 Nightgowns

*Using a nylon mesh bag for small items is recommended.

2 Casual Wear Work Shirts

1 Pair Casual Wear Work Pants

OR

3 Soccer Uniforms

Loading to Dry
As a general rule, if clothes are sorted properly for the wash, they are sorted properly for the dry cycle. Try also to sort items according to size. For example, do not dry a sheet with socks or other small items.
Do not add fabric softener sheets once the load has become warm. They may cause fabric softener stains. Bounce® Fabric Conditioner Dryer Sheets have been approved for use in this unit when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Care and cleaning

Water Supply Hoses
Hoses connecting unit to faucet should be replaced every 5 years.

Exterior
Immediately wipe off any spills. Wipe with damp cloth. Wipe or dust spills or washing compounds with a damp cloth. Unit control panel and finishes may be damaged by some laundry pretreatment and stain remover products. Apply these products away from the unit. The fabric may then be washed and dried normally. Damage to your unit caused by these products is not covered by your warranty. Do not hit surface with sharp objects.

Interior
Dry around the door opening, flexible gasket (including attached hoses) and door glass. These areas should always be clean to ensure a watertight seal.It is recommended to rinse the unit at least once per month with 1 cup of bleach (or other commercially available product manufactured for this purpose, such as Tide® Washing Machine Cleaner) poured directly into the basket without clothes and using the Tub Clean Cycle.The interior of the appliance should be cleaned once a year by qualified service personnel.

Stainless Steel
To clean stainless steel surfaces use a damp cloth with a mild, non-abrasive cleaner suitable for stainless steel surfaces. Remove the cleaner residue and then dry with a clean cloth.The stainless steel used to make the drum provides the highest reliability available in a GE Appliances unit. If the drum should be scratched or dented during normal use, the drum will not rust or corrode. These surface blemishes will not affect the function or durability of the drum.

Door Gasket
Open the door. Using both hands, press down the door gasket. Remove any foreign objects if found trapped inside the gasket. Make sure there is nothing blocking the holes behind the gasket.While holding down the door gasket, inspect the interior of the gasket by pulling it down with your fingers. Remove any foreign objects if found trapped inside this gasket. Make sure there is nothing blocking the holes behind the gasket.When you are finished cleaning the door gasket, remove your hands and the gaskets will return to the operating position.

Pump Filter
Clean EVERY MONTH
to remove any items that may have been caught in the filter or housing.Due to the nature of the front-load unit, it is sometimes possible for small articles to pass to the pump. The unit has a filter to capture lost items so they are not dumped to the drain. To retrieve lost items, clean out the pump filter. Unscrew the pump filter. Rinse off any debris. Replace. Close the access door.

Dispenser Drawer Area
Detergent and fabric softener may build up in the dispenser drawer. Residue should be removed once or twice a month.

  • Remove the drawer by first pulling it out until it stops. Then reach back into the rear of the drawer cavity and press down firmly on the lock tab, pulling out the drawer.
  • Remove the insert from the dispenser drawer. Rinse the insert and drawer with hot water to remove traces of accumulated laundry products.
  •  To clean the drawer opening, use a small brush to clean the recess. Remove all residue from the upper and lower parts of the recess.
  •  Return inserts to the proper compartments. Replace the dispenser drawer.
  •  To reduce buildup in the Dispenser Drawer area:

Moving and Storage
Ask the service technician to remove water from drain pump and hoses. Do not store the unit where it will be exposed to the weather. When moving the unit, the tub should be kept stationary by using the shipping bolts removed during installation. See Installation Instructions in this manual. If these parts are not available, they can be ordered by visiting our Website at GEApplianceparts.com or by calling GE Appliances at 877.959.8688. In Canada, visit your local GE Appliances parts distributor or call 800.661.1616 or GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories.

Long Vacations
Be sure water supply is shut off at faucets. Drain all water from hoses and water filter pump area if weather will be below freezing.

Installation Instructions

  •  Note to Installer – Be sure to leave these instructions with the Consumer.
  •  Note to Consumer – Keep these instructions
  •  Skill level – Installation of this appliance requires basic mechanical and electrical skills.
  •  Completion time – 1-3 hours
  •  Proper installation is the responsibility of the
  • Product failure due to improper installation is not covered under the Warranty.

TOOLS REQUIRED FOR UNIT INSTALLATION

  • Safety Glasses
  • Gloves
  • Level
  • Wrench (provided)
  • Channel-lock adjustable pliers
  •  Water Hoses (2) (Flat washers pre-installed)

LOCATION OF YOUR UNIT

DO NOT Install the Unit:

  1.  In an area exposed to dripping water or outside weather conditions. The ambient temperature should never be below 60°F (15.6°C) for proper unit operation.
  2.  In an area where it will come in contact with curtains or drapes.
  3.  On the carpet. The floor MUST be a hard surface with vibrates or move, you may have to reinforce the floor.

IMPORTANT:
Minimum Installation Clearances

  •  When installed in closet: Sides/Rear = 0” and Top/Front
  •  Consideration must be given to provide adequate clearance for installation and service.
  •  Closet doors must be louvered or otherwise ventilated and have at least 60 square inches (387.1 cm2) of open area. If the closet contains a second laundry unit, doors must contain a minimum of 120 square inches (774.2 cm2) of open area.

Installation Instructions

UNPACKING THE UNIT
plastic bags after the unit is unpacked. Make materials inaccessible to children. Children might use them for play. Cartons covered with rugs, bedspreads or plastic sheets can become airtight chambers causing suffocation.

  1.  Cut and remove all packaging straps.
  2.  While it is in the carton, carefully lay the unit on its side. DO NOT lay the unit on its front or back.
  3.  Turn down the bottom flaps. Remove all base packaging including the styrofoam base.
  4.  Carefully return the unit to an upright position and remove the carton by lifting it upward.
  5.  Carefully move the unit to within 4 feet (122 cm) of the final location.
  6.  Remove the following from the back side of the unit:
  7. bolts plastic spacers (including rubber grommets) NOTE: Do NOT remove the screw or clip holding the hose.
  8. Insert shipping bolt hole covers into shipping bolt holes.

NOTES:

  •  Failure to remove the shipping braces can cause the unit to become severely unbalanced.
  •  IMPORTANT:
  • Save all bolts for future use. If you must transport the unit at a later date, you must reinstall the shipping support hardware to prevent shipping damage. Keep the hardware in the plastic bag provided.

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

  • Plug into a grounded 3-prong outlet.
  • DO NOT remove ground prong.
  • DO NOT use an adapter.
  • DO NOT use an extension cord.
  • Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire or electrical shock.
  • CIRCUIT – Individual, properly polarized and grounded 15 or 20 amp circuit breaker or time-delay fuse.
    POWER SUPPLY – 2 wire plus ground, 120 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz, alternating current. Outlet Receptacle – Properly grounded 3-prong receptacle to be located so the power cord is accessible when the unit is in an installed position. If a 2-prong receptacle is present, it is the owner’s responsibility to have a licensed electrician replace it witha properly grounded 3-prong grounding type receptacle. Unit must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes and ordinances, or in the absence of local codes, with latest edition of the NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA NO. 70 or CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE, CSA C22.1. Check with a licensed electrician if you are not sure that the unit is properly grounded.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This appliance must be grounded. In the event of malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This appliance is equipped with a cord having an equipment- grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.If required by local codes, an external 18 gauge or larger copper ground wire (not provided) may be added. Attach to unit cabinet with a #10-16 x 1/2” sheet metal screw (available at any hardware store) to rear of unit. Disconnect power supply before servicing.
Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock.Certain internal parts are intentionally not grounded and may present a risk of electric shock only during servicing.
Service personnel – DO NOT contact the following parts while the appliance is energized: water valve, drain pump, NTC, motor, fan capacitor, fan motor, heater, door lock, inverter board and MC board.

WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Hot and cold water faucets MUST be installed within 42 inches (107 cm) of your unit’s water inlet. The faucets MUST be 3/4” (1.9 cm) garden hose-type so inlet hoses can be connected. Water pressure MUST be between 10 and 120 pounds per square inch. Your water department can advise you of your water pressure. The hot water temperature should be set to deliver water at 120° to 140°F (48°–60°C) to provide proper Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) performance.

DRAIN REQUIREMENTS

  1.  Drain capable of eliminating 9.5 gals (36 L) per minute.
  2.  A standpipe diameter of 1-1/4” (3.18 cm) minimum.
  3.  The standpipe height above the floor should be: Minimum height: 36” (91.4 cm) Maximum height: 58” (147 cm)

INSTALLING THE UNIT

  1.  Run some water from the hot and cold faucets to flush the water lines and remove particles that might clog the water valve screens.
  2.  Remove the inlet hoses from the plastic bag. Remove black rubber washers from bag and insert into hose fitting before connecting to unit.
  3.  (90° elbow end) Carefully connect the inlet hose marked HOT to the outside “H” outlet of the water valve. Tighten by hand; then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Carefully connect the other inlet hose to the inside “C” outlet of the water valve. Tighten by hand; then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Do not cross-thread or overtighten these connections.
  4. Connect the inlet hose ends to the HOT and COLD water faucets tightly by hand;then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Turn the water on and check for leaks.
  5. Carefully move the unit to its final location. Gently rock the unit into position. It is important not to damage the rubber leveling legs when moving your unit to its final location. Damaged legs can increase appliance vibration. It may be helpful to spray window cleaner on the floor to help move your unit into its final position. NOTE: To reduce vibration, ensure that all four rubber leveling legs are firmly touching the floor. Push and pull on the back right and then back left of your unit.
    NOTE: Do not use the dispenser drawer or door to lift the unit.
    NOTE: If you are installing into a drain pan, you can use a 24-inch-long 2×4 to lever the unit into place.
  6. With the unit in its final position, place a level on top of the unit (if the unit is installed under a counter, the unit should not be able to rock). Adjust the front leveling legs up or down to ensure the unit is resting solidly and level
    front-to-back and left-to-right. It may also be necessary to adjust the rear legs. Turn the locknuts on each leg up toward the base of the unit and snug with a wrench.
    NOTE:
    Keep the leg extension at a minimum to prevent excessive vibration. The farther out the legs are extended, the more the unit will vibrate. If the floor is not level or is damaged, you may have to extend the rear leveling legs.
  7. Attach U-shaped hose guide to the end of the drain hose. Place the hose in a laundry tub or standpipe. Drain hose should be secured to the home or adjacent faucet with a zip-tie to keep it from coming free during operation.
  8.  Plug the power cord into a grounded outlet.
    NOTE: Check to be sure the power is off at the circuit breaker/fuse box before plugging the power cord into an outlet.
  9.  Turn on the power at the circuit breaker/fuse box.
  10.  Read the rest of this Owner’s Manual. It contains valuable and helpful information that will save you time and money.
  11.  Before starting the unit, check to make sure:
  12.  Run the unit through a complete cycle. Check for water leaks and proper operation.
  13.  If your unit does not operate, please review the Troubleshooting Tips section before calling for service.
  14.  Place these instructions in a location near the unit for future reference.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
If replacement parts are needed for your unit, they can be ordered in the United States by visiting our Website at GEApplianceparts.com or by calling GE Appliances at 877.959.8688. In Canada, visit GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories or call 800.661.1616.

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Not draining Not spinning Not tumbling Load is out of balance Redistribute clothes and run Rinse+Spin.

Increase load size if washing small load containing heavy and light items.

Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the Pump Filter.
Drain hose is kinked or improperly connected Straighten drain hose and make sure unit is not sitting on it.
Household drain may be clogged Check household plumbing. You may need to call a plumber.
Drain hose siphoning; drain hose pushed too far down the drain Ensure there is an air gap between hose and drain.
Leaking water Door gasket is damaged Check to see if gasket is seated and not torn. Objects left in pockets may cause damage to the unit (nails, screws, pens, pencils)

Water may drip from the door when the door is opened. This is a normal operation.

Carefully wipe off rubber door seal. Sometimes dirt or clothing is left in this seal and can cause a small leak

Check back left of the unit for water If this area is wet, you have oversudsing condition. Use less detergent.
Fill hoses or drain hose is improperly connected Make sure hose connections are tight at unit and faucets and make sure end of drain hose is correctly inserted in and secured to drain facility.
Household drain may be clogged Check household plumbing. You may need to call a plumber.
Dispenser clogged Powder soap may cause clogs inside the dispenser and cause water to leak out the front of the dispenser. Remove drawer and clean both drawer and inside of dispenser box. Please refer to Care and Cleaning section.
Incorrect use of detergent Use only HE and correct amount of detergent.
Clothes too wet Load is out of balance Redistribute clothes and run Rinse+Spin.
Increase load size if washing small load containing heavy and light items.
Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the Pump Filter.
Overloading Load your unit so clothes have enough room to move freely.
Drain hose is kinked or improperly connected Straighten drain hose and make sure unit is not sitting on it.
Household drain may be clogged Check household plumbing. You may need to call a plumber.
Drain hose siphoning; drain hose pushed too far down the drain Ensure there is an air gap between hose and drain.
Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Incomplete cycle or timer not advancing Automatic load redistribution Timer stops at 1 minute; machine has redistributed the load once or twice. This is normal operation.

Do nothing; the machine will finish the wash cycle.

Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

Drain hose is kinked or improperly connected Straighten drain hose and make sure unit is not sitting on it.
Household drain may be clogged Check household plumbing. You may need to call a plumber.
Drain hose siphoning; drain hose pushed too far down the drain Ensure there is an air gap between hose and drain.
Loud or unusual noise; vibration or shaking Cabinet moving Unit is designed to move 1/4” to reduce forces transmitted to the floor. This movement is normal.
All rubber leveling legs are not firmly touching the floor Push and pull on the back right and then back left of your unit to check if it is level. If the unit is uneven, adjust the rubber leveling legs so they are all firmly touching the floor and locked in place.
Unbalanced load Pause unit, open door and manually redistribute load. To check machine, run rinse and spin with no load. If normal, unbalance was caused by load.
Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

No power/unit not working or dead Unit is unplugged Make sure cord is plugged securely into a working outlet.
This is normal. Control panel is “asleep”. Press the Power button to “wake up” the display.
Unit was accidentally paused when starting Delay Dry If the light on the Start/Pause button is flashing, the unit is paused. Press Start/Pause button to restart the countdown.
Water supply is turned off Turn both hot and cold faucets fully on.
Circuit breaker/fuse is tripped/blown Check house circuit breakers/fuses. Replace fuses or reset breaker. Unit should have separate outlet.
Automatic self system checks First time the unit is plugged in, automatic checks occur. It may take up to 20 seconds before you can use your unit. This is normal operation.
Snags, holes, tears, rips or excessive wear Pens, pencils, nails, screws or other objects left in pockets Remove loose items from pockets.
Pins, snaps, hooks, sharp buttons, belt buckles, zippers and sharp objects left in pockets Fasten snaps, hooks, buttons and zippers.
Control time wrong or changes This is normal During spin the unit may need to rebalance the load sometimes to reduce vibrations. When this happens, the estimated time is increased causing time left to increase or jump.
Not enough water This is normal Horizontal machines do not require the tub to fill with water like top-load machines.
Unit pauses or has to be restarted, or its door is locked and will not open Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Door unlocks or press Start and machine doesn’t operate This is normal Front-load machines start up differently than top-load machines, and it takes several seconds to check the system. The door will lock and unlock.
Incorrect operation Simply open and close the door firmly; then press Start.
Water does not enter unit or enters slowly Automatic self system checks After Start is pressed, the unit does several system checks. Water will flow several seconds after Start is pressed.
Water valve screens are stopped up Turn off the water source and remove the water connection hoses from the upper back of the unit. Use a brush or toothpick to clean the screens in the machine. Reconnect the hoses and turn the water back on.
Inlet hose screen washers are stopped up Turn off the water source and remove the inlet hoses from  the wall faucets. Use a brush or toothpick to clean the screen washers in the end of the hoses. Reconnect the hoses and turn the water back on.
Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

Fill hoses may be kinked Check that fill hoses are not kinked or clogged.
Water supply is turned off Turn on both hot and cold faucets fully.
Energy efficiency This is an energy-efficient unit. As a result, the temperature settings for this unit may be different than for a non-energy- efficient unit.
Insufficient water supply Make sure that the water supply is turned on. Make sure that the water faucets are turned to their completely open position.
The door is open The door must be closed for all cycle operations. If the door is opened during operation, all functions will stop, including water filling.
Incorrect fill hose connection Make sure that the fill hoses connect the hot water supply to the hot inlet on the unit and the cold water supply to the cold inlet on the unit (hot to hot, cold to cold).
Wrinkling Improper sorting Avoid mixing heavy items (like work clothes) with light items (like blouses).
Overloading Load your unit so clothes have enough room to move freely. For best drying results, load the unit 2/3 full.
Incorrect wash cycle Match cycle selection to the type of fabric you arewashing (especially for easy care loads).
Repeated washing in water that is too hot Wash in warm or cold water.
Grayed or yellowed clothes Not enough detergent Use correct amount of detergent.
Not using HE (high efficiency) detergent Use only HE detergent.
Hard water Use hottest water safe for fabric.
Use a water conditioner like Calgon brand or install a water softener.
Water is not hot enough Make sure water heater is delivering water at 120°–140°F (48°–60°C).
Detergent is not dissolving Try a liquid HE detergent.
Dye transfer Sort clothes by color. If fabric label states wash separately, unstable dyes may be indicated.
Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Colored spots Incorrect use of fabric softener Check fabric softener package for instructions and follow directions for using dispenser.
Dye transfer Sort whites or lightly colored items from dark colors.
Promptly remove wash load from unit.
Water temperature is incorrect Water supply is improperly connected Make sure hoses are connected to correct faucets.
House water heater is not set properly Make sure house water heater is delivering water at 120°– 140°F (48°–60°C).
Slight variation in metallic color This is normal Due to the metallic properties of paint used for this unique product, slight variations of color may occur due to viewing angles and lighting conditions.
Bad odor inside your machine Unit unused for a long time, not using recommended quality of HE detergent or used too much detergent Run a Tub Clean cycle.
In case of strong odor, you may need to run the Tub Clean

cycle more than once.

Use only the amount of detergent recommended on the detergent container.
Use only HE (high efficiency) detergent.
Always remove wet items from the unit promptly after machine stops running.
Leave the door slightly open for the water to air dry. Close supervision is necessary if this appliance is used by or near children. Do not allow children to play on or in this or any other appliance.
Detergent leak Incorrect placement of detergent insert Make sure detergent insert is properly located and fully seated. Never put detergent above max line.
This is normal It is normal operation to see detergent leak on door gasket about 20 seconds after filling the dispenser.
Improper dispensing of softener Dispenser clogged Monthly clean the dispenser drawer to remove buildup of chemicals.
Softener is filled above the max line Make sure to have the correct amount of softener.
Softener cap issue Make sure softener cap for dispenser is seated or it will not work.
Dispenser drawer not dispensing properly Laundry detergent packet placed in dispenser drawer Laundry detergent packets should not be used in the dispenser. They should only be added directly to the wash tub following the manufacturer’s directions.
Pump running while unit is not in use Clog in sump drain This is normal. Drain sump is detecting an undesired water  fill level from a potential open faucet. Shut off water valve and inspect water valve for blockage.
Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Clothes take too long to dry Improper sorting Separate heavy items from lightweight items (generally, a well-sorted washer load is a well-sorted dryer load).
Large loads of heavy fabrics (like beach towels) Large, heavy fabrics contain more moisture and take longer to dry. Separate large, heavy fabrics into smaller loads to speed drying time.
Non-venting unit Condensing dryers usually take longer to dry than a vented dryer.
Controls improperly set Match control settings to the load you are drying.
Blown fuses or tripped circuit breaker Replace fuses or reset circuit breakers. Since most dryers use 2 fuses/breakers, make sure both are operating.
Overloading/combining loads Do not put more than one washer load in the unit at a time.
Underloading If you are drying only one or two items, add a few items to ensure proper tumbling.
The Dry dryness level was chosen but load is still damp Load consists of a mixture of heavy and light fabrics When combining heavy and light fabrics in a load, choose

Auto Extra Dry.

Control buttons not responding Controls accidentally put in service mode Press Start/Pause.
Controls accidentally put in lock mode Hold the Soil and Temp buttons for 3 seconds to unlock the unit.
Controls performed an incorrect operation Reset the in-house breaker.
No numbers displayed during cycle, only lights Unit is continuously monitoring the amount of moisture in the clothes This is normal. When the unit senses a low level of moisture in the load, the unit will display the dry time remaining.
Time Remaining jumped to a lower number The estimated time may change when a smaller load than usual is drying This is normal.
Cannot make a selection and the unit beeps twice The dryness Level, Temp or option that you are trying to select is incompatible with the chosen dry cycle This is normal.
Unit is running but 00 is displayed

in Time Remaining

The Ext Tumble option was chosen This is normal. During extended tumbling, the time remaining is not displayed. The extended tumbling option lasts approximately 60 minutes.
Problem Possible Causes What To Do
Unit doesn’t heat Fuse is blown/circuit breaker is tripped; the unit may tumble but not heat Check the building’s fuse/circuit breaker box and replace both fuses or reset both breakers. Your unit may tumble if only one fuse is blown or one breaker tripped.
Inconsistent drying times Type of load and drying conditions The load size, types of fabric, wetness of clothes and/or air intake vent located on the front of the unit will affect drying times.
Excess debris has collected on the fan preventing proper airflow Refer to the Care and Cleaning section.
Clothes are still wet and unit shuts off after a short time The door was opened mid-cycle. The load was then removed from the

unit and a new load put in without selecting a new cycle

A dry cycle must be reselected each time a new load is put in.
Load was already dry except for collars and waistbands Choose Timed Dry to dry damp collars and waistbands. In the future, when drying a load with collars and waistbands, choose Auto Extra Dry.
Unit is not level Move unit to an even floor space or adjust leveling legs as necessary until even.
Clothes are wrinkled Letting items sit in unit after cycle ends Remove items when cycle ends and fold or hang immediately, or use the Ext Tumble option.
Overloading Separate large loads into smaller ones.
Clothes shrink Some fabrics will naturally shrink when washed.

Others can be safely washed, but will shrink while drying in the unit.

To avoid shrinkage, follow garment care labels exactly. Some items may be pressed back into shape after drying.

If you are concerned about shrinkage in a particular item, do not machine wash or tumble dry it.

Greasy spots on clothes Improper use of fabric softener Follow directions on fabric softener package.
Drying dirty items with clean ones Use your unit to dry only clean items. Dirty items can stain clean items and the unit.
Clothes were not completely clean Sometimes stains which cannot be seen when the clothes are wet appear after drying. Use proper washing procedures before drying.
Lint on clothes Improper sorting Sort lint producers (like chenille) from lint collectors (like corduroy).
Static electricity can attract lint See suggestions in this section under Static occurs.
Overloading Separate large loads into smaller ones.
Paper, tissue, etc., left in pockets Empty all pockets before laundering clothes.
Static occurs No fabric softener was used Try a fabric softener.
Synthetics, permanent press and blends can cause static Try a fabric softener.
Problem Possible Causes What To Do
Collars and waistbands still wet at end of cycle The dryness monitor senses that the body of the clothes is dry Choose Timed Dry to dry damp collars and waistbands. In the future, when drying a load with collars and waistbands, choose Auto Extra Dry.
Unit continues to tumble after display says Complete Ext Tumble was selected Ensure Ext Tumble option is not selected.

GE Appliances Washer/Dryer Limited Warranty

GEAppliances.com
All warranty service is provided by our Factory Service Centers, or an authorized Customer Care® technician. To schedule service online, visit us at GEAppliances.com/service, or call GE Appliances at 800.GE.CARES (800.432.2737). Please have your serial number and your model number available when calling for service.Servicing your appliance may require the use of the onboard data port for diagnostics. This gives a GE Appliances factory service technician the ability to quickly diagnose any issues with your appliance and helps GE Appliances improve its products by providing GE Appliances with information on your appliance. If you do not want your appliance data to be sent to GE Appliances, please advise your technician not to submit the data to GE Appliances at the time of service.

What is not covered:

  •  Service trips to your home to teach you how to use the product.
  •  Improper installation, delivery or maintenance.
  •  Failure of the product if it is abused, misused, or used for other than the intended purpose or used commercially.’
  •  Replacement of house fuses or resetting of circuit breakers.
  •  Products that are not defective or broken, or which are working as described in the Owner’s Manual.
  •  Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, floods or acts of God.
  •  Incidental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance.
  •  Defects or damage due to operation in freezing temperatures.
  •  Damage caused after delivery.
  •  Product not accessible to provide required service.
  •  Cleaning of the condenser to restore product drying performance.

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Your sole and exclusive remedy is product repair as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by law.

In the United States:
This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for products purchased for home use within the USA. If the product is located in an area where service by a GE Appliances Authorized Servicer is not available, you may be responsible for a trip charge or you may be required to bring the product to an Authorized GE Appliances Service location for service. In Alaska, the limited warranty excludes the cost of shipping or service calls to your home. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state’s Attorney General.

Consumer Support

GE Appliances Website
Have a question or need assistance with your appliance? Try the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any day of the year! You can also shop for more great GE Appliances products and take advantage of all our online support services designed for your convenience. In the US: GEAppliances.com. In Canada: GEAppliances.ca.

FAQS

How do I know if my unit is operating properly?

If your unit is not operating properly, check the following:
Check to see if the power cord is plugged in.
• Check to see if the door is locked.
• Check to see if the control panel is set to the correct cycle.
• Check to see if there are any obstructions in the drum.
• Check to see if there are any items blocking the door.
• Check to see if the drain hose is connected and draining properly.
• Check to see if there are any loose parts or damaged parts.
• Check to see if the water supply is turned on and hot water is available at the faucet.
If you still cannot find a problem, contact your local service center for assistance.

Are GE washer dryer combos good?

 If you’re after a compact washer dryer combo which is great value and low in price, this is our top pick. The GE GFQ14ESSNWW features industry-leading cycle options, such as steam, sanitize and even add-a-garment wash settings.

How do you open a GE steam washer dryer combo?

If the washer is running, press the START/PAUSE button once it will pause the washer and unlock the door. It will take a few seconds for the door to unlock after pressing PAUSE. Press again to restart the wash cycle. In some cycles the washer will drain first, and then unlock the door when it is paused.

Is GE or LG washer better?

Both machines are high-efficiency by design and Energy Star certified, but the LG uses 105 kWh versus 158 for the larger GE. The GE model offers 12 cycles and nine options, including a wash-and-dry cycle for small loads and the UltraFresh venting system.

How long do GE washer and dryers last?

A GE machine may last longer than a Kenmore and, yet, it may not. The range is more specific with a GE, and you can expect to get 11 or 12 years out of a machine.

Why is my GE dryer not drying?

Check the household fuse or circuit breaker that supplies power to the dryer. Make sure they are not burned out or tripped. There may be too many items in the dryer. Only dry one wash load at a time.

What is the capacity of a washer dryer combo?

The capacity of an all-in-one washer dryer is much smaller than a separate washer or dryer model. All-in-one washer dryers typically have between 2.3 to 4.5 cubic feet of interior space. In comparison, a full-size washer has an average of 5.0 cubic feet, and a dryer has an average of 7.4 cubic feet.

How does a ventless dryer work?

A ventless dryer constantly recirculates air through the drum to pick up moisture from the clothes, then condenses the moisture later in the process through a heat exchanger. This contrasts with vented dryers, which push hot humid air outside through a dryer vent.

How much can you fit in a 2.4 cubic foot washer?

Generally speaking, compact washers have a 2.0 to 2.5 cubic foot capacity and can handle 15 to 20lbs of laundry per load.

Who makes GE washers now?

While GE’s appliance division is now owned by the Chinese company Haier, laundry appliances are still made at GE headquarters in Louisville, Kentucky. Now offering the utmost in technological advances, the 128-year old General Electric Company is a leader in American made washer and dryer brands.

Is GE a good brand?

With a total score of 67, GE is in a three-way tie for eighth place. The brand received mostly good ratings, with electric wall ovens and electric ranges rated excellent. Over-the-range microwaves, as well as top-freezer and bottom-freezer refrigerators, received very good ratings.

Which dryer brand is most reliable?

A reputation for reliability: Consumer Reports surveys its subscribers every year and publishes each dryer brand’s estimated five-year breakage rate. The most-reliable brands include LG, Speed Queen, and Whirlpool (including Amana and Maytag). Brands at the bottom include GE, Electrolux, and Samsung.

How much longer do ventless dryers take?

Ventless dryers are notorious for taking a very long time to dry. This is because the technology used is not efficient. A vented dryer may take around 45-50 minutes to dry the average load of laundry, whereas a ventless could run for an hour and a half.

Are condenser dryers cheaper to run?

Vented dryers are cheaper than condenser dryers as they are more economically friendly to run as they are not having to convert the moisture, they are simply just expelling it from your home.

Do washer dryer combos use a lot of electricity?

Another misconception is that a combo washer dryer has poor energy usage. Many people assume that they used more energy than the regular units, because they have more features. The truth is, condensing dryers use anywhere from 50-70 percent less energy than vented dryers.

Do you have to run dryer twice to dry clothes?

Excess lint, dirt, and debris buildup inside your dryer vent duct or hose reduces airflow. It can’t effectively push the hot, moist air out of the dryer, so it stays in your clothes, causing the dryer to take two cycles to dry.

]]>
GE Appliances Washer GFW510 Instructions Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/washer-gfw510/ Sat, 19 Nov 2022 15:24:48 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=10908 Read More...

]]>

GE Appliances Washer

Whether you grew up with GE Appliances, or this is your first, we’re happy to have you in the family.We take pride in the craftsmanship, innovation and design that goes into every GE Appliances product, and we think you will too. Among other things, registration of your appliance ensures that we can deliver important product information and warranty details when you need them. Register your GE appliance now online. Helpful websites and phone numbers are available in the Consumer Support section of this Owner’s Manual. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration card included in the packing material.

WARNING

  • To reduce the risk of death, fire, explosion, electric shock, or injury to persons when using your appliance, follow basic precautions, including the following:
  •  Read all instructions before using the appliance.
  •  Follow all fabric care instructions and warnings to prevent melting of garments or damage to the appliance.
  •  DO NOT add gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances to the wash water.
  • These substances give off vapors that could ignite or explode.
  •  Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot-water system that has not been used for
  •  DO NOT wash or dry articles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in or spotted with gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances, as they give off vapors that could ignite or explode.
  •  DO NOT allow children to play on or in this appliance. Close supervision of children is necessary when this appliance is used near children. Before the washer is removed from service or discarded, remove the door or lid. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or injury to persons.
  •  DO NOT reach into the appliance if the tub or agitator is moving to prevent accidental entanglement.
  •  DO NOT install or store this appliance where it will be exposed to the weather.
  •  DO NOT tamper with controls, repair or replace any part of this appliance or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in the user maintenance instructions or in published user repair instructions that you understand and have the skills to carry out.
  •  DO NOT climb or stand on this unit.
  •  DO NOT operate this appliance if it is damaged, malfunctioning, partially disassembled, or has missing or broken parts including a damaged cord or plug.
  • Unplug the appliance or turn off the circuit breaker before servicing. Pressing the Power pad DOES NOT disconnect power.
  •  See “ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS” located in the Installation Instructions for grounding instructions.

PROPER INSTALLATION

  • This washer must be properly installed and located in accordance with the Installation Instructions before it is used. Ensure that the hot water hose is connected to the “H” valve and the cold water hose is connected to the “C”
    valve.
  •  Install or store where it will not be exposed to temperatures below freezing or exposed to the weather, which could cause permanent damage and invalidate the warranty.
  •  Properly ground washer to conform with all governing codes and ordinances. Follow details in the Installation Instructions.
  •  Ensure washer is properly leveled and washer legs are adjusted such that unit is stable.
  •  Optional drain hose extension recommended for discharging heights from 60” – 96”.
  •  GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of factory specified parts. A list of factory hoses available for purchase are listed. These hoses are manufactured and tested to meet GE Appliances specifications.
  •  GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of new water supply hoses. Hoses degrade over time and need to be replaced every 5 years to reduce the risk of hose failures and water damage.

WHEN NOT IN USE

Turn off water faucets to minimize leakage if a break or rupture should occur. Check the condition of the fill hoses; GE Appliances recommends changing the hoses every 5 years.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Order online at GEApplianceparts.com today, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours. In Canada, visit your local GE Appliances parts distributor or call 800.661.1616 or GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories.

  • WX14X10011 6 ft stainless steel washer hoses with 90° elbows; 2-pack
  • WH49X316 Washer drain hose extension kit
  • WX10X10011 Tide® Washing Machine Cleaner*
  • PM7X2 Universal low profile washer floor tray
  • GFA28KITN Stack Bracket Kit (to stack dryer on top)
  • GFP1528S 28” width Pedestal with drawer – White
  • GFP1528P 28” width Pedestal with drawer – Colors

Getting started

WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons, read the IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION before operating this appliance. Throughout this manual, features and appearance may vary from your model.

Quick Start:
Step 1
Load clothes into your washer and close the door.
Step 2
If the screen is dark, press the Power pad or turn the knob to “wake up” the display.
Step 3
Turn the knob to select the desired cycle.

Step 4
Open the dispenser and add detergent, bleach and fabric softener, as desired. Models with SmartDispense™ only require that you select the SmartDispense pad once the tank has been filled.

Step 5
Press Start to begin the wash cycle. The machine will weigh your clothes and add the proper amount of water. When the wash cycle is finished, the door will unlock.
Step 6
After the wash cycle is completed and the clothes unloaded, select ULTRA FRESH VENT™ to help eliminate the excess moisture in your washer so you can close the door.

Display and Status Lights (Features and appearance will vary)

The display shows the approximate time remaining until the end of the cycle and the washer cycle status (Fill, Wash, Rinse and Spin).
NOTE:
The cycle time is affected by how long it takes the washer to fill. This depends on the water pressure in your home. The “smart” timer “learns” the amount of time it takes to fill your washer and adjusts the total time accordingly.If an out-of-balance condition is detected by the washer, the Spin light will blink during the remaining portion of the cycle and will stay illuminated for a short time after cycle completion. When this occurs, the washer is taking actions to correct the out-of-balance condition and complete the cycle normally. In some cases, the washer may not be able to balance the load and spin up to full speed. If you notice the load is more wet than usual at the end of the cycle, redistribute the load evenly in the wash tub and run a Rinse & Spin cycle. In addition, the display will show:

In addition, the display will show:

 (WiFi) Will allow your appliance to communicate with your smartphone for remote appliance monitoring, control and notifications. It stays lit whenever the washer is on and is connected. It will blink during the commissioning process or if it loses connection to the network.
Venting Venting will blink to indicate that you can select the ULTRAFRESH VENT feature at the end of the cycle. It then stays illuminated once selected until venting is complete.
Control The controls on the washer are locked when this icon is illuminated. You must press and hold the Control Lock pad to unlock the controls.
Door This icon will illuminate while the door is locked and will blink while the washer is in the process of pausing and then unlocking.
Auto, More, Less

(on some models)

The SmartDispense will automatically dose detergent according to the weight and soil level of the clothes. You can adjust this feature to dose 40% MORE or40% LESS detergent or turn it OFF to manually dose detergent.
Tank Low

(on some models)

Will display when the SmartDispense tank needs to be re-filled. Typically, this first lights up when there are approximately 8 – 10 loads of detergent remaining.
Loads Left

(on some models)

Displays the estimated number of wash loads left for the amount of detergent in the SmartDispense tank.

Features and appearance will vary.

Power
Press to “wake up” the display. If the display is active, press to put the washer into standby “OFF” mode.
NOTE:
Pressing Power does not disconnect the appliance from the power supply.

Start and Pause
Press to start a wash cycle. If the washer is running, pressing it once will pause the washer and unlock the door. It will take a few seconds for the door to unlock after pressing Pause. Press again to restart the wash cycle.
NOTE:
If washer is paused and cycle is not restarted within 15 minutes, the current wash cycle will be cancelled.
NOTE:
The washer performs automatic system checks after pressing the Start pad. Water will flow in 45 seconds or less. You may hear the door lock and unlock and the pump activate before water flows.

Wash Cycles
The wash cycles are optimized for specific types of wash loads. The chart below will help you match the items to be washed with the best wash cycle settings. For optimal performance, select the cycle that most closely matches the items being washed. Selections and options shown in bold are the suggested settings for that cycle. Delay Wash/Remote Start is available on all cycles.

Wash Cycle Items to Wash Soil Level Wash Temp Spin Selection Options Available
Normal Cycle for normal, Extra Heavy Extra Hot Max Prewash* or Autosoak*
regular, or typical use Heavy Hot High Power Steam*
for washing up to a full Normal Warm Medium Time Saver*
load of normally soiled Light Cold Extra Rinse
cotton clothing. Extra Light Tap Cold Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*
Whites Whites and household Extra Heavy Extra Hot Max Prewash* or Autosoak*
linens. Heavy Hot High Power Steam*
Normal Warm Medium Time Saver*
Light Cold Low More Water*
Extra Light Tap Cold Extra Rinse
Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*
Towels Towels, sheets, Extra Heavy Hot Max Prewash* or Autosoak*
pillowcases and dish Heavy Warm High Power Steam*
rags. Normal Cold Medium Time Saver*
Light Tap Cold Low More Water*
Extra Light Extra Rinse
Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*
Bulky Large coats, bed Extra Heavy Hot Max Prewash* or Autosoak*
Bedding spreads, mattress Heavy Warm High Power Steam*
covers, sleeping bags, Normal Cold Medium Time Saver*
and similar large bulky Light Tap Cold Low More Water*
items. Extra Light Extra Rinse
Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*
Sanitize+ Heavily soiled colorfast Extra Heavy Extra Hot Max Prewash
Allergen* items with the need for Heavy High Power Steam*
sanitization. Medium Extra Rinse
Low Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*
Sanitize Heavily soiled colorfast Extra Heavy Extra Hot Max Prewash* or Autosoak*
With Oxi* items with the need for Heavy High Extra Rinse
sanitization. Medium Tumble Care
Low

Some cycles and options may not be available on some models.

NOTE:
The SANITIZE + Allergen cycle’s water temperatures CANNOT be changed. This cycle utilizes elevated water temperature and a longer wash cycle to kill dust mites and reduce 99% of common bacteria from fabrics. A pump purge and extended rinse is incorporated for the purpose of removing contaminants and allergens, such as pet dander.The SANITIZE With Oxi cycle’s water temperatures CANNOT be changed. This cycle, when using an Oxi additive along with your detergent, is designed to remove 99% of bacteria found in home laundry. Measure the detergent and the Oxi products carefully. Using the amounts appropriate for a large heavily soiled load in a front load washer, follow the detergent and the Oxi product label instructions. The washer hot water supply connection must provide a minimum of 120°F to ensure the effectiveness of this cycle.Only the SANITIZE + Allergen and SANITIZE With Oxi cycles have been designed to meet the requirements of sanitizing effectiveness.49-3000217 Rev 2

Wash Cycles – Continued
The wash cycles are optimized for specific types of wash loads. The chart below will help you match the items to be washed with the best wash cycle settings. For optimal performance, select the cycle that most closely matches the items being washed. Selections and options shown in bold are the suggested settings for that cycle. Delay Wash/Remote Start is available on all cycles.

Wash Cycle Items to Wash Soil Level Wash Temp Spin Selection Options Available
Power Clean* For heavily soiled items which require extra cleaning power. Extra Heavy Heavy Normal Extra Hot Hot Warm Cold

Tap Cold

Max High Medium Low Prewash Power Steam Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Quick Wash Small loads of lightly soiled items that are needed in a hurry. Normal Light

Extra Light

Hot Warm Cold

Tap Cold

Max High Medium Low More Water* Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Delicates Lingerie and special care fabrics with light soil. Normal Light Extra Light Warm Cold

Tap Cold

Medium

Low

No Spin

Prewash* or Autosoak* Time Saver* More Water* Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Cold Wash Cycle for normal, regular, or typical use for washing up to a full load of normally soiled cotton clothing using only cold water. Extra Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Extra Light

Cold

Tap Cold

Max High Medium Low Prewash* or Autosoak* More Water* Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Active Wear* Medium to lightly soiled athletic wear items of technical or synthetic fabrics. Extra Heavy Heavy Normal Light

Extra Light

Warm Cold  Tap Cold Medium

Low

No Spin

Prewash Time Saver Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Rinse & Spin For items that need only to be rinsed, use this cycle. Max High Medium Low

No Spin

More Water* Extra Rinse

Tumble Care* or 1 Step Wash + Dry*

Self Clean Cleaning the basket of residue and odor. No clothes to be washed using this cycle. Medium

Some cycles and options may not be available on some models.

Settings

Individual settings for soil level (Level), water temperature (Temp) and spin speed (Spin) can be set from the minimum to maximum. In general, the higher up the column, the more energy will be used.
Soil

Changing the Soil level increases or decreases the wash time to remove different amounts of soil. To change the Soil level, press the Soil level pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between Extra Light, Light, Normal, Heavy or Extra Heavy soil levels on most cycles.

temp
Adjust to select the proper water temperature for the wash cycle. The AutoSoak and PreWash rinse water is always cold to help reduce energy usage and reduce setting of stains and wrinkles.Follow the fabric manufacturer’s care label when selecting the wash temperature.To change the wash temperature, press the Temp pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between Tap Cold, Cold, Warm, Hot or Extra Hot on most cycles. By design, to protect fabrics, not all wash temperatures are available for certain wash cycles. Extra Hot temperatures are enabled by the internal heater on models equipped with Steam capabilities.
NOTE:
The first 10 seconds of the wash fill is always cold. This feature assists in conditioning the fabric and preventing stains from setting on garments.

Spin
Adjusting the Spin speed changes the final spin speed of the cycles. Always follow the garment manufacturer’s care label when changing the Spin speed.To change the Spin speed, press the Spin speed pad until you have reached the desired setting. You can choose between No Spin, Low, Medium, High or Max. Higher spin speeds are not available on certain cycles, such as DELICATES and ACTIVE

WEAR
Higher spin speeds remove more water from the clothes and will help reduce dry time, but may also increase the possibility of setting wrinkles on some fabrics.
NOTE:

This washer features a dBT™ (Dynamic Balancing Technology) system. This patented onboard sensing technology enables real-time balancing of the spin cycle for each load, saving time and providing a quiet wash. This should lead to more consistent wash times and an overall reduction in noise and vibration. If the washer should experience any excessive noise, vibration or shaking, simply Pause the washer, open the door, and manually redistribute the load before restarting the cycle.

Options

SMARTDISPENSE™ (on some models)
When selected, this feature will automatically add detergent to the wash, eliminating the need to add detergent for each load. See the SmartDispense section for details.

MY SETTINGS (on some models)
To save your favorite settings, set the desired settings for wash cycle, soil level, spin speed and wash temp settings and hold down the My Settings pad for 3 seconds. A beep will sound to indicate the cycle has been saved. To use your custom settings, press the My Settings pad before washing a load.To change the saved settings, set the desired settings and hold down the My Settings pad for 3 seconds.

POWER STEAM (on some models)
Power Steam adds steam into the washer before the wash cycle begins to assist with loosening stains on the NORMAL, WHITES, TOWELS, BULKY Bedding, SANITIZE+Allergen and POWER CLEAN cycles.
To use:

  1.  Press the Power pad to “wake up” the washer and select a wash cycle.
  2.  Press the POWER STEAM pad to activate steam.
  3.  Press the Start/Pause pad.

WiFi (may be a shared pad with other options)
Press and hold the WiFi* pad for 3 seconds to activate. See the WiFi Connect section for details on how to get stated with WiFi connection.

Delay Wash/Remote Start
You can delay the start of a wash cycle for up to 24 hours or remote start the washer by using the Delay Wash/Remote Start feature. Press to step by hours or hold to scroll the Delay Wash pad to set the amount of time you want to delay the start of the wash cycle. If you have connected your washer to WiFi, the first selection,“APP”, can be selected to enable remote starting of your washer from the GE Appliance Smartphone app. Or, if you select a delay time in hours, the machine will count down and start automatically following this period. Press the Start pad once you have configured the Delay Wash to the proper setting to enable this feature. To cancel this option, simply power off and power on the controls.
NOTE:
If you forget to fully close the door, a reminder signal will beep reminding you to do so.
NOTE:
If you open the door when the delay is counting down, the machine will enter the pause state. You must close the door and press Start again in order to restart the countdown.

Time Saver (on some models)
This option reduces the overall washer cycle time by optimizing the wash, rinse and spin actions and/or gently raising the wash temperature to get clothes cleaned faster. Option is available on NORMAL, WHITES, TOWELS, DELICATES, BULKY Bedding and ACTIVE WEAR cycles. Total wash time will vary based on cycle chosen and options selected.
To use:

  1.  Turn power on and select a wash cycle which has Time Saver as an option.
  2.  Press the Time Saver pad to reduce the overall wash time.
  3.  Press the Start/Pause pad.

More Water (on some models)
This option adds approximately 3 gallons to the wash and rinse portions of the cycle. If the option is selected before the cycle starts, the water will be added from the beginning of the wash cycle and later to the rinse. If the option is selected during the wash portion, more water will be added at this point and later to the rinse. Likewise, if the More Water option is selected after the wash portion has completed, the washer will add more water to the rinse only. If wash and rinse have completed, the More Water pad will no longer be active.

ULTRAFRESH VENT System with ODORBLOCk
The ULTRA FRESH VENT System with OdorBlock was designed to eliminate excess moisture in the washer following a wash cycle to help prevent odors from developing. This washer was designed to drain water at the end of the cycle more effectively. Following the wash cycle, the user can then choose to leave the door open or select the ULTRA FRESH VENT feature to assist with drying out the gasket and other areas of the washer. The OdorBlock system features multiple components which are manufactured with Microban® antimicrobial technology.* Microban is a safe and effective antimicrobial technology that will last the life of your washer. For more information, please visit www.microban.com/geappliances.
ULTRA FRESH VENT is available after the wash cycle is complete and you have removed your cleaned laundry. Once the door is closed, a notification tune will play and the ULTRA FRESH VENT pad LED will blink. Upon pressing the pad, ULTRA FRESH VENT will begin.

To select ULTRA FRESH VENT at any other point, power on the washer, ensure a cycle is not actively running, and remove any garments from the basket, then press and release the ULTRA FRESH VENT pad so that the notification tune plays and the ULTRA FRESH VENT padLED begins to blink. Then press the ULTRA FRESH VENT pad again to start the feature.During the operation of ULTRA FRESH VENT the door will remain locked and the washer will intermittently spin at low speeds for up to 8 hours.If garments are detected in the basket during ULTRA FRESH VENT, the washer will instead run TUMBLE CARE or 1 STEP WASH + DRY, based on option available for your model.The ULTRA FRESH VENT feature may be cancelled at any time by pressing the POWER pad, turning the cycle knob, or pressing the ULTRA FRESH VENT pad. Microban® is a registered trademark of Microban International, Ltd.

1 STEP WASH + DRY (on some models)
This option is available on all cycles except Self Clean.The 1 STEP WASH + DRY is intended for small loads only. Use when clothes need to be washed, dried and ready to wear or finished the next morning. This feature will tumble clothes and introduce a constant stream of air into the washer compartment upon completion of select wash cycles. Although the drying portion is set to 8 hours, the clothes can be removed at any time by pressing Pause or Power to cancel the cycle.

Tumble Care (on some models)
Freshly tumbles your garments periodically for up to 8 hours after the wash cycle is complete to lessen the setting of wrinkles and creases when you are not able to move clothing to the dryer right away.At the end of the cycle, the display will scroll “END” and after ten minutes the Tumble Care will begin. It can be stopped at any time by pressing the Power pad.

PreWash (on some models)
Prewash is an extra wash before the main wash. Use it for heavily soiled clothes or for clothes with a care label that recommends prewashing before washing. Be sure to add liquid or powder high-efficiency detergent, or the proper wash additive to the prewash dispenser. Washers equipped with SmartDispense will automatically add the proper amount of detergent for prewash based on the load size.

PreWash must be selected prior to pressing Start
The PreWash feature will fill the washer (adding the prewash detergent), tumble the clothes, drain and spin. Then the washer will run the selected wash cycle.
NOTE:
In some special cycles, the prewash is selected automatically as the default. You can modify this selection at any time.

AutoSoak (on some models)
For soaking your garments prior to the wash cycle. This option begins with a brief tumble and then proceeds to soak the clothes with water and detergent for a specified period of time. Once complete, the cycle will continue automatically. AutoSoak must be selected prior to pressing the start pad. The AutoSoak time will add an additional 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour or 2 hours to the overall wash time. High-efficiency detergent from the main wash compartment in the dispenser is used for the AutoSoak period and main wash cycle.

Extra Rinse
This option allows for an extra rinse during a cycle to remove excess dirt and detergent from soiled loads. Press the Extra Rinse pad to select.
NOTE: On Rinse & Spin cycle, a drain and spin cycle can be achieved by pressing the Extra Rinse pad until the LED is no longer illuminated.

Light (on some models)
The basket light will turn on and remain on for 5 minutes when the door opens, Start/Pause pad is pressed, or by pressing the Light pad. The basket light can be turned off by pressing and holding the Light pad.

Sound
To change the loudness of the end of cycle signal and the press pad volume, press the Sound pad as many times as needed to reach the desired volume. There are four sound levels including off.

Control Lock (Light-Control Lock pad) (depending on model)
You can lock the controls to prevent any selections from being made. Or you can lock or unlock the controls after you have started a cycle. Children cannot accidentally start the washer by touching pads with this option selected. To lock/unlock the washer, press and hold the Control Lock/Light-Control Lock pad for 3 seconds. A sound is made to indicate the lock/unlock status. The control lock icon on the display will light up when it is on.
NOTE:
The Power pad can still be used when the machine is locked.

Dispenser Drawer
Slowly open the dispenser drawer by pulling it out until it stops. After adding laundry products, slowly close the dispenser drawer. Closing the drawer too quickly could result in early dispensing of the bleach, fabric softener or detergent. You may see water in the detergent, bleach and fabric softener compartments at the end of the cycle. This is a result of the flushing/siphoning action and is part of the normal operation of the washer.

SmartDispense™ (on some models)
When selected, this feature will automatically add detergent to the wash, eliminating the need to add detergent for each load.The detergent amount selection on the controlpanel will default to AUTO when first powering upthe washing machine. When AUTO is selected, the amount of detergent needed for each laundry load will automatically be determined based on the size of the load the machine senses.For AUTO, the washer will dispense approximately 1.5 oz of detergent for an 8 lb normal load. For other loads, it will adjust proportionally based on the size of load and garment type. If you select LESS, the amount of detergent will be reduced by 40%. This may be desired for higher concentrate detergents or if you have very soft water. For heavily soiled loads, you may want to select MORE to add 40% more detergent than the AUTO level.NOTE: Not all cycles will allow the use of the SmartDispense feature. If the light is not illuminated and pressing the SMART DISPENSE pad results in a beeping tone, then SmartDispense is not allowed for the cycle that has been selected. Detergent will need to be added directly to the detergent compartment for these cycles.Do NOT put detergent packets in the dispenser drawer.
NOTE: Use only liquid or powder HE detergents and additives in the dispenser drawer. Laundry detergent packets should only be added directly to the wash basket following the manufacturer’s directions.

If it is desired to manually select the amount of detergent for a given load, this can be done by pressing the SMART DISPENSE pad on the control panel to select detergent for a Small or Large load. Small will provide less detergent than average and Large will provide more detergent than average.
NOTE: If it is desired to manually add detergent for a load, that detergent will need to be added directly to the basket, and the SMART DISPENSE set to off for that particular load. The smart dispense feature can be disabled by pressing the SMART DISPENSE pad until off is selected.

Detergent Compartment
Only use high-efficiency detergent in this washer. Do NOT fill high-efficiency detergent over the MAX line. Use detergent manufacturer’s recommended amount.

  •  Powder Detergent – Lift the flap up for powder detergent. This must be done to dissolve and flush detergent properly. Follow the detergent manufacturer’s instructions when measuring the amount of powder detergent to use.
  •  Liquid Detergent – Keep the flap down for liquid detergent. This retains the liquid detergent until it automatically flushes at the start of the wash cycle. Follow the detergent manufacturer’s instructions when measuring the amount of liquid detergent to use.

Liquid Bleach Compartment
If desired, measure out the recommended amount of liquid bleach, not to exceed 1/3 cup (80 ml) and pour into the compartment labeled “LIQUID BLEACH” marked with this symbol . It is recommended to use High-Efficiency (HE) bleach in this front-load washer.

Fabric Softener Compartment
If desired, pour the recommended amount of liquid fabric softener into the compartment labeled “FABRIC SOFTENER”.Use only liquid fabric softener in the dispenser. Dilute with water to the maximum fill line.Detergent usage may need to be adjusted for water temperature, water hardness, size and soil level of the load. Avoid using too much detergent in your washer as it can lead to oversudsing, detergent residue being left on the clothes, and could extend wash times.
Do not put clumped detergent in the dispenser. Clumped detergent can cause a leak. Do NOT put detergent packets in the dispenser drawer.

Do not exceed the maximum fill line. Overfilling can cause early dispensing of the bleach which could result in damaged clothes.
NOTE:
Do not use powdered bleach or laundry detergent/additive packets in the dispenser.Do not exceed the maximum fill line. Overfilling can cause early dispensing of the fabric softener, which could stain clothes.
NOTE:
Do not pour fabric softener directly on the wash load.

WiFi Connect (For customers in the United States only – on some models)

Your washer is GE Appliances WiFi Connect enabled.Visit geappliances.com/connect and enter your model number to show you the proper steps to connect your appliance.Please visit GEAppliances.com/connect to learn more about connected appliance features, to learn what connected appliance app’s will work with your smartphone. WiFi Connectivity: For assistance with the appliance or the ConnectPlus network connectivity, please call GE Appliances at 800.GE.CARES.

Loading
Always follow fabric manufacturer’s care label when laundering.

Sorting Wash Loads
Sort by color (whites, lights, colors), soil level, fabric type (sturdy cottons, easy care, delicates) and whether the fabric produces lint (terry cloth, chenille) or collects lint (velveteen, corduroy). Wash lint producers such as cotton towels and socks separate from lint collectors including synthetic garments and dress pants.

WARNING

  • DO NOT wash fabrics soiled with flammable liquids or cleaning solvents. No washer can completely remove oil.
  • DO NOT wash or dry anything that has been soaked in or spotted with any type of oil (including cooking oils).
  • DO NOT reach into the washer until all moving parts have stopped.
  • Doing so can result in death, explosion, fire or amputation.

Loading the Washer
The wash drum may be fully loaded with loosely added items.To add items after the washer has started, press Start/Pause and wait until the door is unlatched. The washer may take up to 30 seconds to unlock the door after pressing Start/Pause, depending on the machine conditions. Do not try to force open the door when it is locked. After the door unlocks, open gently. Add items, close the door and press Start/Pause to restart.
Loading Examples

WORKWEAR LINENS MIXED LOAD DELICATES* QUICK WASH (2–3 GARMENTS)
4 Jeans

5 Work Wear Shirts

3 Work Wear Pants

2 Bath Sheets 10 Bath

Towels/ 12

Washcloths

7 Hand Towels/

2 Terrycloth Bath Mats

OR

2 Flat Queen-Sized

Sheets

2 Fitted Queen-Sized Sheets

4

Pillowcases

4 Pillowcases

2 Hand Towels

2 Flat Sheets/

2 Fitted Sheets

2 Bath Towels/

4 Washcloths

OR

6 Shirts (Men’s or Women’s)

4 Pair Pants (Khakis or Twills)

5 T-shirts

7 Pairs of Boxers 4 Pairs of Shorts OR

6 T-shirts

4 Pairs of Sweatpants 4 Sweatshirts

2 Hoodies

7 Pairs of Socks

7 Bras

7 panties

3 Slips

2 Camisole

4 Nightgowns

*Using a nylon mesh bag for small items is recommended.

2 Casual Wear Work Shirts

1 Pair Casual Wear Work Pants

OR

3 Soccer Uniforms

Care and cleaning

Water Supply Hoses
Hoses connecting washer to faucet should be replaced every 5 years.

Exterior
Immediately wipe off any spills. Wipe with damp cloth. Wipe or dust spills or washing compounds with a damp cloth. Washer control panel and finishes may be damaged by some laundry pretreatment and stain remover products. Apply these products away from the washer. The fabric may then be washed and dried normally. Damage to your washer caused by these products is not covered by your warranty. Do not hit surface with sharp objects.

Interior
Dry around the washer door opening, flexible gasket (including attached hoses) and door glass. These areas should always be clean to ensure a watertight seal. You will notice if you regularly use the ULTRAFRESH VENT System that this will not be required as often. It is recommended to rinse the washer at least once per month with 1 cup of bleach (or other commercially available product manufactured for this purpose, such as Tide® Washing Machine Cleaner) poured directly into the basket without clothes and using the Self Clean Cycle.

Self Clean
To clean the interior of the washer, select the SELF CLEAN feature on the control panel. This Self Clean cycle should be performed, at a minimum, onceper month or about every 30-40 wash cycles. This cycle will use more water, in addition to bleach, to control the rate at which soils and detergents may accumulate in your washer.
NOTE:
Read the instructions below completely before starting Self Clean cycle.

  1.  Remove any garments or objects from the washer and ensure the washer basket is empty.
  2.  Open the washer door and pour one cup or 250 ml of liquid bleach or other washing machine cleaner into the basket.
  3.  Close the door and select the SELF CLEAN cycle. Push the Start pad.
  4.  When the Self Clean cycle is working, the display will show the estimated cycle time remaining. The cycle will complete in about 90 minutes. Do not interrupt the cycle.
  5. After the cycle is complete, the washer will automatically start an ULTRAFRESH VENT operation so that the door can remain closed until the next time you use the washer.
  6. If for any reason the cycle needs to be interrupted, the door will not open immediately. Forcing open the door at this stage may cause water to flood. The door will open after the water is drained to a level where it would not flood the floor.
    Self-Clean may be interrupted by pressing the Start pad in between cycles. A power outage in the house might also interrupt the cycle. When the power supply is back, the Self Clean cycle resumes where it had stopped. When interrupted, be sure to run a complete Self Clean cycle before using the washer. If the Power pad is pressed during Self Clean, the cycle will be lost.
    IMPORTANT:

    •  Run Self Clean with 1 Cup (250 ml) of bleach once a month.
    •  After the completion of a Self Clean cycle, the interior of your washer may have a bleach smell.
    •  It is recommended to run a RINSE & SPIN or a light color load after the Self Clean cycle.

Door Gasket
Open the washer door. Using both hands, press down the door gasket. Remove any foreign objects if found trapped inside the gasket. Make sure there is nothing blocking the holes behind the gasket.While holding down the door gasket, inspect the interior of the gasket by pulling it down with your fingers.

Remove any foreign objects if found trapped inside this gasket. Make sure there is nothing blocking the holes behind the gasket. When you are finished cleaning the door gasket, release it and the gasket will return to the operating position.

Dispenser Drawer Area
Detergent and fabric softener may build up in the dispenser drawer. Residue should be removed once or twice a month.

  • • Remove the drawer by first pulling it out until it stops. Then reach back into the rear of the drawer cavity and press down firmly on the lock tab, pulling out the drawer.
    • Rinse the drawer with hot water to remove traces of accumulated laundry products.
    • To clean the drawer opening, use a small brush to clean the recess. Remove all residue from the upper and lower parts of the recess.
    • Replace the dispenser drawer.
  • To reduce buildup in the Dispenser Drawer area:

Pump Filter
Due to the nature of the front-load washer, it is sometimes possible for small articles to pass to the pump. The washer has a filter to capture lost items so they are not dumped to the drain. To retrieve lost items, clean out the pump filter.

  1.  Using a small flathead screwdriver or coin, open the access door.
  2.  Place a shallow pan or dish under the pump access door and towels on the floor in front of the washer to protect the floor. It is normal to catch about a cup of water when the filter is removed.
  3.  Pull down the pour spout.
  4.  Turn the pump filter counterclockwise and remove the filter slowly, controlling the flow of the draining water.
  5.  Remove the filter and clean the debris from the filter.
  6.  Replace the filter and turn clockwise. Tighten securely.
  7.  Flip up the pour spout.
  8.  Close the access door by hooking the bottom tabs first, then rotating the access door shut.

Moving and Storage
Ask the service technician to remove water from drain pump and hoses. Do not store the washer where it will be exposed to the weather. When moving the washer, the tub should be kept stationary by using the shipping bolts removed during installation. See Installation Instructions in this manual. If these parts are not available, they can be ordered by visiting our Website at GEApplianceparts.com or by calling GE Appliances at 877.959.8688. In Canada, visit your local GE Appliances parts distributor or call 800.661.1616 or GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories.

Long Vacations
Be sure water supply is shut off at faucets. Drain all water from hoses and water filter pump area if weather will be below freezing.

Installation Instructions

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Read these instructions completely and carefully.

  • Note to Installer – Be sure to leave these instructions with the Consumer.
  • Note to Consumer – Keep these instructions for future reference.
  •  Skill level – Installation of this appliance requires basic mechanical and electrical skills.
  •  Completion time – 1-3 hours
  •  Proper installation is the responsibility of the installer.
  •  Product failure due to improper installation is not covered under the Warranty.

LOCATION OF YOUR WASHER

DO NOT Install the Washer:

  1.  In an area exposed to dripping water or outside weather conditions. The ambient temperature should never be below 60°F (15.6°C) for proper washer operation.
  2.  In an area where it will come in contact with curtains or drapes.
  3.  On carpet. The floor MUST be a hard surface with  To make sure the washer does not vibrate or move, you may have to reinforce the floor. plywood sheet solidly attached to existing floor covering.

MOBILE HOME INSTALLATION:
Installation must conform to Standard for Mobile Homes, ANSI A119.1 and National Mobile Home Construction and Safety Standards Act of 1974 (PL93-383).

TOOLS REQUIRED

PARTS SUPPLIED

PARTS REQUIRED (Sold separately or included with the GFW510 model)

GE Appliances Parts and Accessories
Order on-line at GEApplianceparts.com today, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours. In Canada, visit your local GE Appliances parts distributor or call 800.661.1616 or GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories.Part Number Accessory WX14X10011 6 ft stainless steel washer hoses .

NOTE:
With leveling legs retracted: 39-3/4 (101 cm).
With leveling legs fully extended: 40-5/8 (103.1 cm).

MINIMUM CLEARANCES

  • Alcove or Closet
  •  Consideration must be given to provide adequate clearance for installation and service.
  •  Closet doors must be louvered or otherwise ventilated and have at least 60 square inches (387.1 cm2) of open area. If the closet contains both a washer and a dryer, doors must contain a minimum of 120 square inches (774.2 cm2) of open area.
  •  To enable 0” clearance on the back of the washer, you must use 90° elbow hoses. Otherwise you may require some additional clearance to avoid rubbing of the hoses against the back wall.

ACCESSORIES:

Order on-line at GEApplianceparts.com, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours.

Part Number Accessory
GFP1528SNWW White Pedestal
GFP1528PNSN Satin Nickel Pedestal
GFP1528PNRS Royal Sapphire Pedestal
GFP1528PNDG Diamond Gray Pedestal
GFA28KITN Stacking Kit for Dryer over Washer

UNPACKING THE WASHER

  1.  Cut and remove all packaging straps.
  2.  While it is in the carton, carefully lay the washer on its side. DO NOT lay the washer on its front or back.
  3.  Turn down the bottom flaps. Remove all base packaging including the styrofoam base.
  4.  Carefully return the washer to an upright position and remove the carton by lifting it upward.
  5. Carefully move the washer to within 4 feet (122 cm) of the final location.
  6. Remove the following from the back side of the washer: 4 bolts
  7. NOTE: Do NOT remove the screw or clip holding the hose.

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

  • Plug into a grounded 3-prong outlet.
  • DO NOT remove ground prong.
  • DO NOT use an adapter.
  • DO NOT use an extension cord.
  • Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire or electrical shock.
  • CIRCUIT – Individual, properly polarized and grounded 15 or 20 amp circuit breaker or time-delay fuse.
  • POWER SUPPLY – 2 wire plus ground, 120 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz, alternating current.
  • Outlet Receptacle – Properly grounded 3-prong receptacle to be located so the power cord is accessible when the washer is in an installed position. If a 2-prong receptacle is present, it is the owner’s responsibility to have a  licensed electrician replace it witha properly grounded 3-prong grounding type receptacle. Washer must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes and ordinances, or in the absence of local codes, with latest edition of the NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA NO. 70 or CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE, CSA C22.1. Check with a licensed electrician if you are not sure that the washer is properly grounded.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This appliance must be grounded. In the event of malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This appliance is equipped with a cord having an equipment- grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.If required by local codes, an external 18 gauge or larger copper ground wire (not provided) may be added. Attach to washer cabinet with a #10-16 x 1/2” sheet metal screw (available at any hardware store) to rear of washer.

Electrical Shock Hazard
Disconnect power supply before servicing.Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock. Certain internal parts are intentionally not grounded and may present a risk of electric shock only during servicing.Service personnel – DO NOT contact the following parts while the appliance is energized: water valve, drain pump, NTC, heater, door lock, inverter board, motor and MC board.

WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Hot and cold water faucets MUST be installed within 42 inches (107 cm) of your washer’s water inlet. The faucets MUST be 3/4” (1.9 cm) garden hose-type so inlet hoses can be connected. Water pressure MUST be between 10 and 120 pounds per square inch. Your water department can advise you of your water pressure. The hot water temperature should be set to deliver water at 120° to 140°F (48°–60°C) to provide proper Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) performance.
NOTE: A water softener is recommended to reduce buildup of scale inside the steam generator if the home water supply is very hard.

DRAIN REQUIREMENTS

INSTALLING THE WASHER

  1.  Run some water from the hot and cold faucets to flush the water lines and remove particles that might clog the inlet hose and water valve screens.
  2.  Remove the inlet hoses from the packaging (whether supplied with the washer or sold separately).
  3.  (90° elbow end) Ensure there is a rubber washer in the 90° elbow end of the HOT and COLD hoses. Reinstall the rubber washer into the hose fitting if it has fallen out during shipment. Carefully connect the inlet hose marked HOT to the outside “H” outlet of the water valve. Tighten by hand, then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Carefully connect the other inlet hose to the inside “C” outlet of the water valve. Tighten by hand; then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Do not cross-thread or over-tighten these connections.
  4.  If inlet hose screen washers are not already inserted into the inlet hoses, install them by inserting into the free ends of the HOT and COLD inlet hoses with protruded side facing the faucet.
  5.  Connect the inlet hose ends to the HOT and COLD water faucets tightly by hand, then tighten another 2/3 turn with pliers. Turn the water on and check for leaks.
  6.  Carefully move the washer to its final location. Gently rock the washer into position. It is important not to damage the rubber leveling legs when moving your washer to its final location. Damaged legs
    can increase washer vibration. It may be helpful to spray window cleaner on the floor to help move your washer into its final position.
    NOTE: To reduce vibration, ensure that all four rubber leveling legs are firmly touching the floor. Push and pull on the back right and then back left of your washer. NOTE: Do not use the dispenser drawer or door to lift the washer.
    NOTE: If you are installing into a drain pan, you can use a 24-inch long 2×4 to lever the washer into place.
  7. With the washer in its final position, place a level on top of the washer (if the washer is installed under a counter, the washer should not be able to rock). Adjust the front leveling legs up or down to ensure the washer is resting solidly. Turn the lock nuts on each leg up toward the base of the washer and snug with a wrench.
    NOTE: Keep the leg extension at a minimum to prevent excessive vibration. The farther out the legs are extended, the more the washer will vibrate. If the floor is not level or is damaged, you may have to extend the rear leveling legs.
  8. Attach U-shaped hose guide to the end of the drain hose. Place the hose in a laundry tub or standpipe and secure it with the cable tie provided in the enclosure package.
  9. Plug the power cord into a grounded outlet. NOTE: Check to be sure the power is off at the circuit breaker/fuse box before plugging the power cord into an outlet.
  10.  Turn on the power at the circuit breaker/fuse box.
  11.  Read the rest of this Owner’s Manual. It contains valuable and helpful information that will save you time and money..
  12. Before starting the washer, check to make sure: Main power is turned on.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
If replacement parts are needed for your washer, they can be ordered in the United States by visiting our Website at GEApplianceparts.com or by calling GE Appliances at 877.959.8688. In Canada, visit GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories or call 800.661.1616.

REVERSING THE DOOR SWING (Optional)

Unplug the appliance or turn off the circuit breaker before servicing. Pressing the Power pad DOES NOT disconnect power. Certain internal parts are intentionally not grounded and may present a risk of electric shock only during servicing.
Service personnel – DO NOT contact the following parts while the appliance is energized: water valve, drain pump, NTC, heater, door lock, inverter board, motor and MC board.

REMOVE THE DOOR ASSEMBLY

  •  Open the washer door.
  •  While supporting the door, remove the 6 screws from the hinge in the washer face.
  • Lift the door assembly to remove it from the washer face and set it on a protective surface.

IMPORTANT NOTES

  •  Handle parts carefully to avoid scratching paint.
  •  Provide a non-scratching work surface for the door.
  •  Set screws down by their related parts to avoid using them in the wrong places.
  •  Once you begin, do not move the cabinet until door-swing reversal is completed.
  •  These instructions are for changing the hinges from the left side to the right side—if you ever want to switch them back to the right side, follow these same instructions and reverse all references to the left and right.
  •  Remove the 3 screws from the hinge cover and remove the cover.
  •  Remove the 6 screws from the hinge and remove the hinge from the door.
  • Remove the 2 screws from the striker. Rotate the striker 180° and reinstall the striker with its screws.
  • Remove the 2 screws from the striker assembly and remove the assembly by pulling it toward the center, pushing it up and pulling it out.
  • Rotate the striker assembly and replace it on the opposite side with its screws.
  •  Rotate the door hinge and replace it on the opposite side with its screws.
  •  Rotate the door hinge cover and replace it on the opposite side with its screws.
  •  Using your fingers, pry the terminal holder from the washer face.
  •  Disconnect the pin connector.
  • Remove the 2 screws from the lock cover and remove it from the washer face.
  • Insert the provided lock bar into the lock mechanism in the washer face. Remove the lock assembly by removing its two screws, using the lock bar to lift it up to unhook, tilting and pulling it out of the washer face. Disconnect its pin connector by unsnapping its locks.
  • Do NOT rotate lock assembly. Move it to the opposite side of the washer and connect the pin connector making sure it is fully snap locked together. Tilt and insert the lock assembly into the washer face, lift it up and latch its hook into its window. Replace its screws. Remove the lock bar from the assembly and retain for future use.
  • Install the lock cover over the lock assembly, making sure the locating post fits into the locating hole and that the lock switch operates freely. Replace its screws.
  • Reconnect the pin connector and press the terminal holder back into the washer face on the opposite side.
  • Lift the door assembly into place and secure it onto the washer face with its 6 screws.
  •  Close the washer door.
    NOTE: Make sure the door opens and closes correctly. If not, repeat all steps making sure all parts and screws are securely seated.
  •  Connect power cord and turn on the breaker.
  •  Run the washer through a complete cycle to verify proper operation.

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Grayed or yellowed clothes Not enough detergent Use correct amount of detergent.
Not using HE (high efficiency) detergent Use only HE detergent.
Hard water Use hottest water safe for fabric.
Use a water conditioner like Calgon brand or install a water softener.
Water is not hot enough Make sure water heater is delivering water at 120°–140°F (48°–60°C).
Detergent is not dissolving Try a liquid HE detergent.
Dye transfer Sort clothes by color. If fabric label states wash separately, unstable dyes may be indicated.
Colored spots Incorrect use of fabric softener Check fabric softener package for instructions and follow directions for using dispenser.
Dye transfer Sort whites or lightly colored items from dark colors.
Promptly remove wash load from washer.
Water temperature is incorrect Water supply is improperly connected Make sure hoses are connected to correct faucets.
House water heater is not set properly Make sure house water heater is delivering water at 120°– 140°F (48°–60°C).
Bad odor inside your Washer Washer unused for a long time, not using

recommended quality of HE detergent or used too much detergent

Regularly use ULTRAFRESH VENT between uses.
In case of strong odor, you may need to run the Self Clean

cycle more than once.

Use only the amount of detergent recommended or adjust

SmartDispense to LOW.

Use only HE (high efficiency) detergent.
Always remove wet items from the washer promptly after it stops running or use 1 Step Wash + Dry or Tumble Care.
If you choose to not use the ULTRAFRESH VENT System, leave the door slightly open for the washer to air dry. Close supervision is necessary if this appliance is used by or near children. Do not allow children to play on or in this appliance.
Detergent leak This is normal It is normal operation to see detergent leak on door gasket about 20 seconds after filling the dispenser.
Improper dispensing of softener or bleach Dispenser clogged Monthly clean the dispenser drawer to remove buildup of chemicals.
Softener or bleach is filled above the max line Make sure to have the correct amount of softener.
Dispenser drawer not dispensing properly Laundry detergent packet placed in dispenser drawer Laundry detergent packets should not be used in the dispenser. They should only be added directly to the wash tub following the manufacturer’s directions.
Pump running while washer is not in use Clog in sump drain This is normal. Drain sump is detecting an undesired water  fill level from a potential open faucet. Shut off water valve and inspect water valve for blockage.
Problem Possible Cause What To Do
Washer pauses or has to be restarted, or washer door is locked and will not open Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

Door unlocks or press Start and machine doesn’t operate This is normal Front-load washers start up differently than top-load washers, and it takes several seconds to check the system. The door will lock and unlock.
Incorrect operation Simply open and close the door firmly; then press Start.
Water does not enter washer or enters slowly Automatic self system checks After Start is pressed, the washer does several system checks. Water will flow several seconds after Start is pressed.
Water valve screens are stopped up Turn off the water source and remove the water connection hoses from the upper back of the washer. Use a brush or toothpick to clean the screens in the machine. Reconnect the hoses and turn the water back on.
Inlet hose screen washers are stopped up Turn off the water source and remove the inlet hoses from  the wall faucets. Use a brush or toothpick to clean the screen washers in the end of the hoses. Reconnect the hoses and turn the water back on.
Pump filter may be clogged See the Care and Cleaning section on how to clean the

Pump Filter.

Fill hoses may be kinked Check that fill hoses are not kinked or clogged.
Water supply is turned off Turn on both hot and cold faucets fully.
Energy efficiency This is an energy-efficient washer. As a result, the temperature settings for this washer may be different than for a non-energy- efficient washer.
Insufficient water supply Make sure that the water supply is turned on. Make sure that the water faucets are turned to their completely open position.
The washer door is open The washer door must be closed for all washer cycle operations. If the door is opened during the washer operation, all functions will stop, including water filling.
Incorrect fill hose connection Make sure that the fill hoses connect the hot water supply to the hot inlet on the washer and the cold water supply to the cold inlet on the washer (hot to hot, cold to cold).
Wrinkling Improper sorting Avoid mixing heavy items (like work clothes) with light items (like blouses).
Overloading Load your washer so clothes have enough room to move freely.
Incorrect wash cycle Match cycle selection to the type of fabric you are washing (especially for easy care loads).
Repeated washing in water that is too hot Wash in warm or cold water.

GE Appliances Washer Limited Warranty

All warranty service is provided by our Factory Service Centers, or an authorized Customer Care® technician. To schedule service online, visit us at GEAppliances.com/service, or call GE Appliances at 800.GE.CARES (800.432.2737). Please have your serial number and your model number available when calling for service.Servicing your appliance may require the use of the onboard data port for diagnostics. This gives a GE Appliances factory service technician the ability to quickly diagnose any issues with your appliance and helps GE Appliances improve its products by providing GE Appliances with information on your appliance. If you do not want your appliance data to be sent to GE Appliances, please advise your technician not to submit the data to GE Appliances at the time of service.

For the period of: We will replace:
One year

From the date of the original purchase

Any part of the washer which fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship. During this limited one-year warranty, we will also provide, free of charge, all labor and related service to replace the defective part.
Ten years

From the date of the original purchase

The motor, if it should fail due to a defect in materials or workmanship. During this additional nine-year limited warranty, you will be responsible for any labor and related service costs.

What is not covered:

  •  Service trips to your home to teach you how to use the product.
  •  Improper installation, delivery or maintenance.
  •  Failure of the product if it is abused, misused, or used for other than the intended purpose or used commercially.
  •  Replacement of house fuses or resetting of circuit breakers.
  •  Products which are not defective or broken, or which
  •  Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, floods or acts of God.
  •  Incidental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance.
  •  Defects or damage due to operation in freezing temperatures.
  •  Damage caused after delivery.
  •  Product not accessible to provide required service.

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Your sole and exclusive remedy is product repair as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by law.

In the United States:
This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for products purchased for home use within the USA. If the product is located in an area where service by a GE Appliances Authorized Servicer is not available, you may be responsible for a trip charge or you may be required to bring the product to an Authorized GE Appliances Service location for service. In Alaska, the limited warranty excludes the cost of shipping or service calls to your home.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state’s Attorney General. Warrantor: GE Appliances, a Haier Company, Louisville, KY 40225

Consumer Support

GE Appliances Website
Have a question or need assistance with your appliance? Try the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any day of the year! You can also shop for more great GE Appliances products and take advantage of all our on-line support services designed for your convenience. In the US: GEAppliances.com. In Canada: GEAppliances.ca.

GE Appliances Website
Have a question or need assistance with your appliance? Try the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any day of the year! You can also shop for more great GE Appliances products and take advantage of all our on-line support services designed for your convenience. In the US: GEAppliances.com. In Canada: GEAppliances.ca.

Remote Connectivity
For assistance with wireless network connectivity (for models with remote enable), in the US visit our website at connected-home-smart-appliances/ or call 800.220.6899. In Canada: http://www.geappliances.ca/en/news-and-promotions/what-is-hot/wifi-connect/.

FAQS

How do I know if my appliance has been recalled?

Please visit our website at www.geappliances.com and click on the “Product Recalls” link to see if your appliance has been recalled. If it has been recalled, we will provide you with the steps to take to have your appliance repaired. If you have any questions, please call our Consumer Assistance Center toll-free at 1-800-432-2737. GE Appliances Washer Instructions Manual

Is GE a good brand for washers?

GE is considered to be one of the most reliable brands on the market. With proper installation, level floors, and ideal water hardness conditions, you should be able to get up to 10 years of use out of a GE washer.

Why is GE washer not working?

If the light on the washer doesn’t turn on, try restarting the washing machine by pressing the Start/Pause Wash button. The light should come on again. If it still doesn’t turn on, check if the outlet’s power is on. If it is, unplug and plug in the washer to a different outlet.

Which is the most reliable washing machine brand?

Whirlpool, LG, and Samsung are the most reliable brands of washers. Yale Appliance found that less than 7% of the sales of these units required servicing. J.D. Power also ranks Samsung and LG as the highest-ranking manufacturers in customer satisfaction.

Does a GE washer have a reset button?

To reset the electronic controls on your washer, shut off the circuit breaker or fuse to the washer or unplug the washer for 2 minutes. For models that have a timer control knob, turn the knob around and back to any position other than final spin for the interrupted cycle. Then, restore power.

Does unplugging a washer reset it?

On a machine without a reset button, unplugging the washer and then plugging it back in often serves as the means to reset it. Although not usually a button, programmable washing machines might have a reset function or position to clear a program problem.

Why is my GE washer stuck on sensing?

A GE washer stuck on sensing can be one of three problems depending on the exact model. It is either a clog in the drain pump, a failed drain pump, or faulty transmission. The first problem is an easy DIY fix, the last two issues will require the help of a service tech.

Are GE Appliances good quality?

GE refrigerators are known for their reliability, good quality, and innovative features, which is reflected in all their models on the market. Across top-freezer, bottom-freezer, side-by-side, and French Door models, GE fridges have great longevity, and all have at least a one-year company warranty.

Who makes GE washers now?

While GE’s appliance division is now owned by the Chinese company Haier, laundry appliances are still made at GE headquarters in Louisville, Kentucky. Now offering the utmost in technological advances, the 128-year old General Electric Company is a leader in American made washer and dryer brands.

What is the difference between an agitator and impeller?

Washing machines with agitators use a central post that twists back and forth, rubbing against clothes to help break apart stains. In contrast, washing machines with impellers use a low-profile cone or disc that spins/rotates to rub clothes against each other to get them clean.

Where is GE front load washer made?

GE has added two new assembly lines to its plant in Appliance Park and for the first time will manufacture front-loading washing machines and their matching dryers in the U.S. The folks in Louisville, Kentucky are happy because the move creates 200 new jobs.

Are front load or top load washers better?

Front load washers are considered superior at cleaning clothes with less water and less wear on your fabrics. Top load washers clean faster and are slightly more ergonomic, so it may come down to the monetary value.

Which washers last the longest?

As far as washing machines go, there are few which last as long as Speed Queen washing machines. The top-end machines are rated to last for 25 years or 10,400 loads. Speed Queen also offers between 3-7 year warranties.

Is GE owned by China?

GE Appliances: Now, despite rumors recently pushed in viral social media posts, General Electric has not been sold itself to Chinese interests. But GE’s appliance division was indeed sold, in 2016, to the Chinese tech company Haier.

What is better Maytag or Whirlpool?

Both brands will deliver a durable product and a quality clean. Maytag washing machines provide a greater value and display of features compared to Whirlpool, whereas with Whirlpool, you will find a greater selection of top-load and front-load products with a wider range of price points.

Is GE a good brand for washers?

GE is considered to be one of the most reliable brands on the market. With proper installation, level floors, and ideal water hardness conditions, you should be able to get up to 10 years of use out of a GE washer.

]]>
GE Appliances Opal 2.0 Ice Maker Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/opal-2-0-ice-maker/ Sat, 18 Mar 2023 18:40:48 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=24490 Read More...

]]>
 

GE Appliances Opal 2.0 Ice Maker Instruction Manual

GE Appliances Opal 2.0 Ice Maker Instruction Manual

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THE APPLIANCE
WARNING

  • Do not, under any circumstances, alter or remove the third (ground) prong from the power cord. For personal safety, this product must be properly grounded.
  • Do not exceed power outlet ratings. It is recommended that the ice maker is connected to its own circuit. Use only a 115 V. 60 Hz standard electrical supply that is properly grounded in accordance with the National Electric Code and local codes and ordinances.
  • Due to potential safety hazards under certain conditions. we strongly advise against the use of an extension, However, if you must use an extension cord, it is absolutely necessary that it is a UL-listed, 3-wire ground type appliance extension cord having a grounding type plug and that the electrical rating of the cord is 15 Amperes (minimum) and 120 Volts.
  • This product must be properly installed and located in accordance with the installation instructions before it is used Product is for indoor household use only. Do not use
  • Do not store or use flammable vapors or liquids near this
  • Do not allow children to climb, stand. or hang on the ice They could seriously injure themselves.
  • Do not look directly at the UV lamp when it is operating. The light emitted by the lamp will cause serious eye damage and burn unprotected skin.
  • In order to avoid exposure to UV radiation, disconnect covers.
  • Do not use water that is micro-biologically unsafe or of unknown quality.
  • Place the power cord in such a way it cannot be pulled on by children or cause a tripping hazard.
  • Place the power cord in such a way that it is not in contact with hot surfaces.
  • Do not operate if any component, including the cord or plug, is damaged.
  • Unplug the product before cleaning by hand and when not in use
  • Do not immerse any part of the product in water.
  • Do not plug or unplug the product with wet hands.
  • Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, modify. or replace any part of your product.
  • Use this product only for its intended purpose as described in this user manual.
  • Do not use any accessories not recommended by the
  • When handling, installing, and operating the appliance. care should be taken to avoid damage to the refrigerant
  • Servicing shall be performed by factory authorized service personnel and component parts shall be replaced with manufacturer authorized replacement components.

CAUTION
To reduce the risk of injury when using your Opal, follow these basic safety precautions.

  • Do not remove any safety. warning. or product information labels from your ice maker.
  • Lifting Hazard: It is recommended to have two people move and install the ice maker in order to prevent injury.

Refrigerant and Foam Disposal
Dispose of appliances in accordance with Federal and Local Regulations. Flammable refrigerant and insulation material used require special disposal procedures. Contact your local authorities for the environmentally safe disposal of your appliance.
WARNING
FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD Flammable Refrigerant

This appliance contains isobutane refrigerant, also known as R600a, a natural gas with high environmental compatibility. However, it is also combustible. Adhere to the warnings below to reduce the risk of injury or property damage. 

  1. When handling, installing, and operating the appliance. care should be taken to avoid damage to the refrigerant tubing.
  2. Service shall only be performed by authorized service personnel. Use only manufacturer-authorized service parts.
  3. Dispose of the refrigerator in accordance with Federal and Local Regulations. The flammable refrigerant and insulation material used in this product require special disposal procedures. Contact your local authorities for the environmentally safe disposal of your refrigerator.
  4. Keep ventilation openings in the appliance enclosures or in the built-in structure clear of obstruction.
  5. To remove frost, scrape with a plastic or wood spatula or scraper. Do not use an ice pick or metal or sharp-edged instrument as it may puncture the freezer liner and then the flammable refrigerant tubing behind it.
  6. Do not use electrical appliances inside the food storage compartment of the appliance.
  7. Do not use any electrical device to defrost your appliance

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

PARTS INCLUDED

GETTING STARTED

Installation Requirements
CAUTION
Lifting Hazard: It Is recommended to have two people move and Install the Icemaker In order to prevent injury.

  • The product is designed to be installed indoors. Do not use your ice maker outdoors.
  • The product must be installed upright on a flat, level surface that is able to support the total weight when full of water.
  • Ensure a minimum of three inches (3″) clearance around the side and back walls of the ice maker for proper air circulation.
  • Install the product in a well-ventilated area with an ambient temperature between 55°F and 90°
  • Do not place the product near heat sources such as ovens or cooktops.
  • Do not place the product in direct sunlight.

Prepare Opal For Use

  1. Carefully remove the packing material. Do not use sham tools that can damage the box contents.
  2. Ensure all components are present. If any item is missing, please contact 1.866.907.6718.
  3. Place the ice maker upright on a flat, level surface and plug it in.
  4. Install drip tray by sliding it under the front edge of The tray slots should align with the front feet of Opal.
  5. Sanitize and rinse the ice maker with clean water for five minutes before first use.

NOTICE
Some types of under-cabinet lamps can be hot enough to cause damage to your Opal top’s appearance.

CARE AND CLEANING

To keep your nugget ice tasting fresh and your Opal looking great, we recommend cleaning/sanitizing your Opal once per week.
To clean the exterior of the ice maker, unplug the product, then use a soft cloth dampened with soapy water to gently clean the exterior surfaces.
Dry with a soft cloth. The exterior stainless steel surfaces can be cleaned with commercially available stainless steel cleaner.
Use only a liquid cleaner free of grit and rub in the direction of the brush lines with a damp, soft sponge.
Do not use appliance wax, polish, solvents, or chemicals on the stainless steel. Do not use soap to clean the reservoir. Use a soft cloth moistened with water.
WARNING
Chemical Exposure Hazard, when cleaning with bleach, use bleach in a well-ventilated area and avoid mixing bleach with other household cleaners.
WARNING
Unplug the product before cleaning by hand, and when not in use.

System Cleaning / Sanitizing Procedure

To clean Opal’s internal components. complete the following steps:

  1. Unplug Opal,
  2. Remove water filter (if present). and replace with the reservoirs screened intake cap. See Figure 1.
  3. Drain Opal (see page 8 for detailed instructions).
  4. Create a solution of five cups of water and one teaspoon of household bleach. Skip to page 9 for further instructions on how to remove hard mineral
  5. Pour the solution into the water reservoir, up to the fill line shown. See figure 2.
  6. Plugin Opal and hold the ‘Clean’ button for 3 seconds to initiate the cleaning process. See figure 3
  7. Water will begin circulating and the ‘Cleaning’ indicator will light up on the left-hand side of the unit to confirm the unit is now in the cleaning process. See figure 4. After three minutes the water will stop and the ‘Cleaning’ indicator light will turn off.
  8. When the ‘Cleaning’ indicator light turns off. drain the
  9. Unhook the top of the drain hoses at the back of the unit See figure 5
  10. Then lay them down to drain into a sink or bucket that is below the level of the ice maker. See Figures 6 and 7.
  11. Remove the plugs and allow the water to completely See figure 7.
  12. Once the water stops flowing. re-insert the drain plugs.
  13. To rinse: add five cups of fresh water to the water reservoir, and press the ‘Clean’ button to initiate a second cleaning cycle. To exit the cleaning cycle at any time. press and hold the ‘Clean’ button for 3
  14. Repeat steps 8 through 13 two more times. adding fresh water to the reservoir each time (you may continue to repeat the rinse cycle. as many times as you like).
  15. Replace drain tubes on the back. See figure 8.
  16. When complete. fill the unit with fresh water and press the ‘Power’ button to start making ice. See figure 9.

UNDERSTANDING THE DISPLAY

Care and Cleaning

Removal of Mineral Deposits

  1. Fill the reservoir with white vinegar to the max fill line and run up to three cleaning cycles. Or purchase an Opal Cleaning Kit and follow instructions inside.
  2. If using vinegar. leave the vinegar in the unit for 18 hours and set a vinegar-soaked towel on the ice chute overnight to further dissolve any mineral buildup. See figure 10.
  3. Clean the sensors with vinegar and wipe them clean with water. After draining the vinegar. run three rinse cycles. using freshwater for each rinse. See figures 11. 12. and 13 to reference the location of the sensors.

Cleaning the Bin and Tray
To clean the ice bin. remove the ice bin from the ice maker and clean with a soft cloth dampened with soapy water. Rinse thoroughly. Dry with a soft cloth. Do not use solvents or chemicals.
The drip tray should be wiped dry. Water left in this area may leave deposits. To clean the drip tray. remove the tray from Opal and use a soft cloth dampened with mild soapy water to gently clean the surface. Dry with a soft cloth. Do not use solvents or chemicals.
Understanding the display

Power
The Power button. when pressed. will begin the ice-making process. When pressed. while ON. will tum the ice maker off.
Light
The light feature has three different modes: ONIDIWOFF Toggle between the three modes by pressing the light button until you reach your desired lighting mode.
Clean
The cleaning cycle is initiated by pressing and holding the ‘Clean’ button for three seconds.
Indicator Lights
The four indicator lights on the left-hand side of the unit display the current status of the Opal. If ‘Add Water is highlighted. your unit needs more water before it can cycle to make ice or clean.
Win
Using the complimentary SmartHO mobile app. custom­ers can connect to their Opal and control it from their An­droid or iPhone. The indicator light on the left-hand side will confirm a successful connection. See page 14 for how to connect Opal 2M Ice Maker to WIFi Application.

Making Ice with Opal

Once Opal has been cleaned sanitized. move the ice maker to its desired location and complete the following steps.

  1. Remove ice bin, Fill the reservoir with potable (safe to drink) water up to the “Max Fill’ line. Water hardness must be less than 12 grains per gallon. Do not fill the reservoir with any liquid except water. Using any liquid except potable water is misuse and will void your warranty
  2. Plug the ice maker into a grounded outlet.
  3. Touch the Power button to start the ice maker. The indicator on the left-hand side will light up ‘Making Ice’ to confirm that unit has begun to make ice.
  4. Opal will begin to produce ice in 15-30 minutes. It will continue to make ice until the bin is full. or it runs out of water. To continue making ice. just add more water.

Draining Opal

We recommend draining your Opal when.

  1. You put it away or anytime it’s being relocated
  2. You turn it off for more than a few days (i.e vacation)
  3. You are not using much ice. Continuous recirculation of meltwater may affect the taste. For best results. drain your Opal.

Water Filter

The Opal Water Filter is available at GE Appliances and is the only water filter compatible with Opal. Please cleaning your following the installation instructions included with your filter.
NOTE: Remove your water filter (if installed) and reinstall the screened intake cap prior to Opal.

SIDE TANK ACCESSORY

NOTE: The Side Tank Accessory is only included with model numbers XPIO13BCBT and XPIO13SCSS.
NOTE: There are two drain tubes located on the back of your Opal Nugget Ice Maker indicated as drain tubes A and B in the illustration on page 11

  1. Hand Washes Only: Rinse and hand wash Opal Side Tank with warm water and mild dish soap. Remove Opal Side Tank’s cap and wash the cap and rubber valve with water and mild dish soap. The Side Tank base can be washed by disconnecting the hose and adding a small amount of soapy water to it. Scrub as needed and rinse thoroughly. The rinse water should drain out the port in the back.
    Rinse the cap. rubber valve. tank and the base well to remove any residual soap (see illustration)

    DO NOT WASH THE SIDE TANK IN THE DISHWASHER.

  2. Unplug Opal Nugget, Ice Maker. Unhook Opals drain tubes and drain the water from the reservoir.
  3. Connect drain tube. labeled B. to the back of Opal Side Tank’s base
  4. Make sure drain tube (A) is connected to the black hanger and installed on the back of Opal.
  5. Make sure drain tube (B) connecting to the Side Tank is resting flat on the countertop.
  6. Place Opal Side Tank on the right or left-hand side of the Opal Nugget Ice Maker. Us ng the side tank attachment. slide the shorter side of the attachment under the unit. near the front of the unit. The at ached will slide into a slot on the bottom of the unit. Once this is placed. the side tank can slide onto the opposite atta home. See the figures below and on the next page.

    NOTE: Care should be taken to connect the correct tube to the Opal Side Tank. Tube (B) should always be connected to the Side Tank whether it is installed on the left or right side of the Opal Nugget Ice Maker. It is important to make sure the tube is lying flat, otherwise, water may not flow from the side tank into the ice maker.

  7. Remove Opal Side Tank’s reservoir from its base.
  8. Unscrew Opal Side Tank’s cap from the reservoir. Fill the clear reservoir with water.
  9. Replace Opal Side Tank’s cap. Ensure the cap is clean when installing.
  10. Carefully flip over Opal Side Tank’s reservoir and place it in the base. Water should start flowing into the Opal Nugget Ice Maker and bubbles in the Opal Side Tank will appear periodically during the time water is flowing to the ice maker.
    NOTE: If water does not appear to flow into the ice maker. please check for the following.
    – There may be bubbles in the tube (B) connecting the Side Tank to the Opal.
    – Tube (B) is not lying flat.
    If either of the above issues is present. adjust tube (B) to allow the water to flow
  11. Fill Opal Nugget Ice Maker’s reservoir (if desired).
  12. Plugin Opal Nugget Ice Maker. and begin making ice.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of electrical shock or in safety precautions:

  • Unplug the product before cleaning by hand and when not in use.
  • Do not use water that is microbiologically unsafe or of unknown quality.
  • Use caution when filling and installing Opal Side Tank. as the filled unit may be heavy.
  • Do not use this side tank for any liquid other than water.
  • Children should not fill or install Opal Side Tank. as the filled unit may be heavy.
  • The side tank should be assembled to an ice maker per installation instructions. Installing the side tank in a different manner may result in overturning the risk.
  • Make sure that Opal Nugget Ice Maker is unplugged when draining the reservoir and installing Opal Side Tank.
  • Ensure that Opal Side Tank is installed on a level surface that will be stable even when Opal Side Tank is full.
  • Make sure the cap of the Side Tank remains clean during filling and operation. Hands should be washed and clean prior to opening and closing the cap.

Use and Care
Cleaning the Side Tank

  • Remove and drain the Side Tank.
  • If there is residual water in the Opal Side Tank base unit. flip Opal Side Tank’s base to drain.
  • Remove and wash Opal Side Tank’s cap and valve with dish soap and warm water as needed. Ensure the cap is clean after removing and re-installing by hand.
  • Only remove drain tubes while near a sink or bucket. as removing drain tubes from Opal or Opal Side Tank will drain any water in either unit.

Proper Installation and Location
The side tank should be installed flush to the front of the Opal Nugget Icemaker. Opal Side Tank needs to sit on the same level surface as your Opal Nugget Ice Maker. Do not elevate Opal Side Tank. or your Opal may overflow.
To Remove Mineral Deposits:
Mix two quarts of water with two quarts of white vinegar. OR use the Opal Cleaning Kit.
Clean any visible mineral buildup or deposits with this solution. If deposits are present in the tank, fill the tank with this solution and let soak. Be sure to drain and rinse the tank thoroughly after cleaning. Stubborn deposits may require more than one treatment
Side Tank Troubleshooting
If water does not flow from the Side Tank to the Opal Ice Maker:
There may be bubbles in the tube connecting the side tank to the Opal if the tube is not lying flat. Try adjusting the tube to allow the water to flow. Once the water starts flowing it typically will not need further adjusting.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Normal Operating Sounds
Your new ice maker may make sounds that are not familiar. floor, walls, and countertops can amplify these sounds. And what may be creating them?

  • WHIR – When Opal is first turned on, you may notice the condenser fan spinning.
  • BUZZ – When the water pump first tums on, it may be dry and slightly noisy. Once it is filled with water, the noise reduces significantly.
  • RATTLE – Rattling noises may be produced from the flow of the refrigerant. These noises should reduce significantly once the refrigerant system has stabilized.
  • GURGLE – When the refrigerant system shuts off, there may be a brief gurgle as the refrigerant stops flowing.
  • HUM – The compressor is a motor. It produces a low-toned humming sound while it is running.
  • CLICK – As nugget ice is produced, it drops into the ice The first nuggets produced are the loudest, as they impact the bottom of the ice bin. As the bin fills, this noise reduces significantly.
  • SQUEAK — When Opal is in need of defrosting, it may start to squeak as the ice starts to build up around the mechanisms. The defrost cycle is automatic and may take 30-45 minutes. During this time, the front button won’t respond. More frequent squeaking usually requires white vinegar cleaning to remove internal mineral scale buildup.

Radio Frequency Interference
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits set forth in Title 47 CFR Part 15 – Radio
Frequency Devices. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This product generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by unplugging Opal, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

  • Reorient or relocate the N or radio antennas.
  • Increase the distance between the product and N or radio.
  • Plug Opal into a separate outlet from a radio or N.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with other antennas or transmitters.

WiFi Connect — SmartHQ
Your OPAL 2.0 ice maker is WiFi Connect Enabled. A WiFi communication card is built into the product allowing it to communicate with your Smart Phone for remote monitoring, control, and notifications.
Please visit geappliances.com/ge/connected-appliances/ to learn more about connected appliance features and to learn what connected appliance apps will work with your Smart Phone.

ICE MAKER PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Description of product Portable nugget ice maker
Model XPIOI3BCBT / XPI013SCSS I XPIO23BCBT I XPIO23SCSS
Voltage/Frequency 120V AC/60Hz
Current 3.0 A
Ice storage capacity 3.0 lbs
Ice making rate 24 lbs per day / 1Ib per hour’
Dimensions (width x depth x height) 13.43 x 17.5 x 16.5
Installation clearance (sides and back) 3 in
Operating environment 55T – 90’F
Weight (when empty) 38.6 lbs

NOTE: Technical data and performance information provided for reference only.
Specifications are subject to change. Check the rating label on your ice maker for the most accurate information.
*The actual quantity of ice produced will vary with environmental conditions.
Note: Products containing refrigerants
This product contains a refrigerant. which under Federal Law must be removed prior to product disposal. If you are disposing of this. or any refrigeration product, check with your local waste company for guidance.
WARNING
In order to avoid exposure to UV radiation, disconnect power to the ice maker before removing the external covers.

Do not attempt to repair or replace the UV lamp

NOTES

LIMITED WARRANTY

GE Appliances Ice Maker Limited Warranty
GEAppliances.com
Please have your serial number and your model number available when calling for service. Call 1.866.907.6718 for service questions.

For the Period of: GE Appliances Covers
One Year
From the date of the original purchase
If the ice machine fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship. during the limited one-year warranty, GE Appliances will either replace your product with a new or remanufactured product. or refund the purchase price of the product at GE Appliances sole discretion.

What GE Appliances Will Not Cover:

  • Service trips to your home.
  • Improper installation, delivery, or maintenance.
  • Failure of the product if it is abused, misused, or used for other than the intended purpose or used
  • Replacement of house fuses or resetting of circuit
  • Damage caused after delivery.
  • Replacement of the light bulbs, if included.
  • Damage to the product caused by accident. fire, floods, or acts of God.
  • Incidental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance.
  • Software bugs that can be corrected with an update via the SmartHQ App
  • Labor and other charges to install and/or remove the product

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Your sole and exclusive remedies are product exchange or refund as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by law.
For sale in the 50 United States and the District of Columbia only: For US Customers: This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser for products purchased for home use within the USA. In Alaska and Hawaii. the limited warranty does not include the costs of shipping units.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state’s Attorney General.
Staple your receipt here. Proof of the original purchase date is needed to obtain service under the warranty.

CONSUMER SUPPORT

Service and Registration
Register your new appliance online at your convenience! Timely product registration will allow for enhanced communication and prompt service under the terms of your warranty, should the need arise.
Register your appliance at GEAppliances.com/regIster or visit myopalservlce.com to submit a service request.
Contact Us
If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from GE Appliances, contact us on our Website with all the details including your phone number, or write to:
In the US: General Manager, Customer Relations I GE Appliances, Appliance Park I Louisville, KY 40225 GEAppllances.com/contact
In Canada: Director, Consumer Relations, MC Commercial Inc. I Suite 310, 1 Factory Lane I Moncton, N.B. E1C 9M3 GEAppllances.ca/en/contact-us

FAQS

Does this machine come with 5 year amazon warranty?? these machines don’t last much longer than a year. there’s no way i’d buy this model without one

I purchased a square trade (Allstate) 4 year warranty from Amazon $60. With all the people reporting problems wouldn’t buy it without extending warranty

Is it refrigerated

No, the container is not refrigerated, but that does not seem to be a problem. In the morning, the tub is about half full. I stir it up and the maker gets to making. What melts returns to the system to be made into nuggets again. I too was worried, but it’s not an issue.

What is the difference between this one and the previous version?

There are a number of differences between the Opal models. Some of these differences include -OPAL01GEPKT has a large round control button in the front with an lighted LED display ring that shows the status of the icemaker. The XPIO models do not have a round button; they have control pads at the top right corner and shows the status at the top left corner. The side tank attaches differently. The XPIO models are available in Black Stainless and Stainless while the OPAL01GEPKT is available only in Stainless. The OPAL01GEPKT connects to a smartphone using bluetooth technology and the GE Profile Opal app. The XPIO models are Wi-Fi enabled and connect to a smartphone and the SmartHQ™ app. The SmartHQ app is our Smart Home app and allows control of our smart appliances. Also, the XPIO models are slightly smaller and not as heavy as the older machine. All of our Opal icemaker offer the “good ice” and we’re confident once of these models will fit your needs. Kind regards

Does this have the cleaning cycle with uv light?

Skip the scrubbing thanks to an advanced, self-cleaning system that keeps your ice maker mold and mildew free when paired with the Opal Cleaning Kit and built in UV light that has the ability to limit bacteria.”
You also make up a bleach solution when you want to clean machine.

Why do the ice maker light cone on blue it is getting water to it an not making ice very fast

The light you’re describing usually means the unit needs water. If you’re seeing it even though the unit is full of water, we’d recommend contacting Opal Support for additional troubleshooting. They can be reached by calling 1-866-907-6718 (Monday – Friday, 8 AM – 8 PM EST). Kind regards – Vikki@GEA

Is this 17.5 tall?

This unit is 16.5” tall and has overall dimensions of 16.5” H x 13.43” W x 17.5” D. We hope this helps, and are confident this ice maker would be a great fit for your needs! If you have any other questions or concerns, we’re always happy to offer assistance.

What do you need the side tank for ?

It keeps the machine supplied with ice. If you don’t have the side tank, you will be filling the internal tank quite often.

when we remove ice bin and replace it. the unit sprays water into the bin and melts remaining ice. Is this normal operation?

he only time the unit has pumped water into the ice hopper, it was at the beginning of the cycle to get the water back down to the bottom reservoir. It looked like it was trickling down the back wall of the ice hopper. If it’s spraying, it might possibly be clogged. If it’s new, not normal behavior that I’ve experienced.

How do i fix the problem of the buckets getting condensation on the back making the sensor think its full of ice? Hence i get very small amouts of ice

As soon as it gets full empty it because if you let the ice sit *& it starts to melt condensation is going to happen. Just empty it & dry it off when it gets full.

Why does my add water light stay on continuously even though it has plenty of water?

The line from your side tank needs to be flat on the surface of your counter. You could also have an air bubble in the tube, just squash the tube multiple times.

Ordered this and it is broken how do I send it back

Contact GE

Does this machine require a drain hose?

Two hoses are attached, one is connected to the water storage container. Both are used to drain the system when cleaning. I would suggest setting the ice maker up near a sink. Will make it easier

Does this have a Proposition 65 warning?

 Yes, the Opal icemaker does come with a Prop 65 warning.

While making ice and you need to refill with water do you have to turn opal off then back on?

It is not necessary to turn the unit off when refilling with water. When the ice bin is removed, ice making operation ceases until water is added and the bin has been reinstalled. We appreciate you checking with us.

Is there a way to run a water line to this system?

No, there isn’t an approved method of running a water line to the unit. We are glad you checked with us.

VIDEO

Write the model and serial numbers here:
Model # _________________
Serial # _________________
Find these numbers on a label on the back of the unit.
GE is a trademark of the General Electric Company. Manufactured under trademark license.
49-1000464 Rev. 4 02-21 GEA

THANK YOU FOR MAKING GE APPLIANCES A PART OF YOUR HOME.
Whether you grew up with GE Appliances, or this is your first, we’re happy to have you in the family.
We take pride in the craftsmanship, innovation, and design that goes into every GE Appliances product and we think you will too. Among other things, registration of your appliance ensures that we can deliver important product information and warranty details when you need them.
The Good Ice™

OPAL 2.0 ICE MAKER
OWNER’S MANUAL
XPIO13BCBT
XPIO13SCSS
XPIO23BCBT
XPIO23SCSS

geappliances.com


]]>
GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/gtx33gaskww-dryers/ Sat, 24 Jun 2023 18:01:54 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=120998 Read More...

]]>

Installation Instructions

Questions? Call GE Appliances at 800. GE.CARES (800.432.2737) or visit our Web site at: GEAppliances.com

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Read these instructions completely and carefully.
IMPORTANT – Save these instructions for local electrical inspector’s use.
IMPORTANT – Observe all governing codes and ordinances.

  • Install the clothes dryer according to the manufacturer’s instructions and local codes.
  • Note to Installer – Be sure to leave these instructions with the Consumer.
  • Note to Consumer – Keep these instructions for future reference.
  • Clothes dryer installation must be performed by a qualified installer.
  • This dryer must be exhausted from the outdoors.
  • Before the old dryer is removed from service or discarded, remove the dryer door.
  • Do not allow children on or in the appliance. Close supervision of children is necessary when the appliance is used near children.
  • Proper installation is the responsibility of the installer.
  • Product failure due to improper installation is not covered under the Warranty.
  • Install the dryer where the temperature is above 50°F for satisfactory operation of the dryer control system.
  • Remove and discard existing plastic or metal foil duct and replace with UL-listed duct.
  • Service information and the wiring diagram are located in the control console.

WARNING
– Fire or Explosion Hazard
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly could
result in serious injury, death, or property damage.
– DO NOT store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.
– WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS:

  • DO NOT try to light any appliance.
  • DO NOT touch any electrical switch; DO NOT use any phone in your building.
  • Clear the room, building, or area of any occupants.
  • Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbors phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions.
  • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department.
    – Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or gas supplier.

WARNING
– Risk of Fire

  • Clothes dryer installation must be performed by a qualified installer.
  • Install the clothes dryer according to these instructions and local codes.
  • DO NOT install a clothes dryer with flexible plastic venting materials. If flexible metal (semi-rigid or foil-type) duct is installed, it must be UL-listed and installed in accordance with the instructions found in “Connecting the Dryer to House Vent” later in this manual. Flexible venting materials are known to collapse, be easily crushed, and trap lint. These conditions will obstruct dryer airflow and increase the risk of fire.
  • DO NOT install or store this appliance in any location where it could be exposed to water or weather.
  • To reduce the risk of severe injury or death, follow all installation instructions.
  • Save these instructions. (Installers: Be sure to leave these instructions with the customer.)

FOR GAS DRYERS ONLY
In the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, the following installation instructions apply:

  • Installation must be performed by a qualified or licensed contractor, plumber, or gasfitter qualified or licensed by the State.
  • If using a ball valve, it shall be a T-handle type.
  • A flexible gas connector, when used, must not exceed 4 feet.

UNPACKING YOUR DRYER
Tilt the dryer sideways and remove the foam shipping pads by pulling at the sides and breaking them away from the dryer legs. Be sure to remove all of the foam pieces around the legs. Remove the bag containing the literature.

ROUGH-IN DIMENSIONS

Cubic Foot X Y
6.2 43 3/8” (110 cm) 26 3/4” (68 cm)
7.2 43 3/8” (110 cm) 29 1/2” (75 cm)
7.4 43 3/4” (111 cm) 30 1/2” (78 cm)
7.4 (with Riser) 45 1/2” (116 cm) 30 1/2” (78 cm)

STEAM WATER HOSES (for steam dryer models only):

GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of factory-specified parts. These hoses are manufactured and tested to meet GE Appliances specifications. GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of new water supply hoses. Hoses degrade over time and need to be replaced every 5 years to reduce the risk of hose failures and water damage.
Parts and Accessories
Order online at GEApplianceparts.com, 24 hours a day
or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours.

Part Number Accessory
WE25X20060 Complete Kit (hoses, Y-adapter, washers)
or
WE49X25794 Kit (Short hose, Y-adapter, washers)
and
WE1M847 Long Hose
OR SEPARATELY
WE1M847 Long Hose and
WE1M848 Short Hose

ACCESSORIES:

Order online at GEApplianceparts.com, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours.

Part Number Accessory
PM14X10056 Dryer door opening vent brush
WX14X10007 LintEaterTM Dryer rotary tube brush
PM08X10085 Flexible Metal Dryer Transition Duct

REQUIREMENTS FOR ALCOVE OR CLOSET INSTALLATION
WARNING
– Explosion Hazard

Keep flammable materials and vapors, such as gasoline, away from the dryer. Place dryer at least 18” (46 cm) above the floor for a garage installation. Failure to do so can result in death, explosion, or fire.

  • The dryer MUST be vented to the outdoors.
  • Minimum clearance between dryer cabinet and adjacent walls or other surfaces is:
    0” either side
    0” rear
    0” front
    1” top
  • Consideration must be given to provide adequate clearance for installation and service.
  • Closet doors must be louvered or otherwise ventilated have at least 60 square inches of open area. If the closet contains both a washer and a dryer, doors must contain a minimum of 120 square inches of open area.

NOTE: WHEN THE EXHAUST DUCT IS LOCATED AT THE REAR OF THE DRYER, THE CONFIGURATION OF THE DUCTING MAY REQUIRE GREATER THAN 1” OF REAR CLEARANCE.
Gas Dryers Only:

  • No other fuel-burning appliance shall be installed in the same closet as a gas dryer.
  • The dryer must be disconnected from the gas supply piping during pressure testing at pressures greater than ½ psi (3.5 kPa).
  • A 1/8 inch NPT minimum plugged tapping, accessible for test gauge connection, must be installed immediately upstream of the gas supply connection to the dryer.

MINIMUM CLEARANCE OTHER THAN ALCOVE OR CLOSET INSTALLATION
Minimum clearance to combustible surfaces and for air opening is 0” on both sides, 0” rear, and 1” top. Consideration must be given to provide adequate clearance for installation and service.

MOBILE OR MANUFACTURED HOME INSTALLATION

  • Installation MUST conform to the MANUFACTURED HOME CONSTRUCTION AND SAFETY STANDARD, TITLE 24, PART 3280 or STANDARD FOR MOBILE HOMES CAN/CSA-Z240 MH, or, when such standards are not applicable, with AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD FOR MOBILE HOME, ANSI/NFPA NO. 501B.
  • The dryer MUST be vented to the outdoors.
  • The exhaust vent MUST be securely fastened to a non-combustible portion of the mobile home.
  • The vent MUST NOT be terminated beneath a mobile or manufactured home.
  • The vent duct material MUST BE METAL.
  • KIT 14-D346-33 MUST be used to attach the dryer securely to the structure.
  • The vent MUST NOT be connected to any other duct, vent, or chimney.
  • DO NOT use sheet metal screws or other fastening devices which extend into the interior of the exhaust vent.
  • Provide an opening with a free area of at least 25 square inches for the introduction of outside air into the dryer room.
  • See the sections for electrical connection information.

CONNECTING INLET HOSES (for steam dryer models only)

CONNECTING INLET HOSES
To produce steam, the dryer must connect to the cold water supply. Since the washer must also connect to the cold water, a “Y” connector is inserted to allow both inlet hoses to make that connection at the same time.
NOTE: Use new inlet hoses; never use old hoses.

  1. Turn the cold water faucet off. Remove the washer inlet hose from the washer fill valve connector (cold).
  2. Ensure the rubber flat washer is in place and attach one female coupling of the short hose provided onto the washer fill valve connector. Tighten by hand until firmly seated.
  3. Attach one male end of the “Y” connector to the other female coupling of the short hose. Ensure the rubber flat washer is in place. Tighten by hand until firmly seated.
  4. Insert the filter screen in the coupling of the washer’s inlet hose. If a rubber flat washer is already in place remove it before installing the filter screen. Attach this coupling to one male end of the ‘’Y’’ connector. Tighten by hand until firmly seated.
  5. Ensure the rubber flat washer is in place and attach a 4 ft. to 6 ft. long water inlet hose (may need to be purchased separately) to one male end of the ‘’Y’’ connector. Tighten by hand until firmly seated.
  6. Ensure the rubber flat washer is in place and attach the other end of the dryer’s long inlet hose to the fill valve connector at the bottom of the dryer back panel. Tighten by hand until firmly seated.
    CONNECTING INLET HOSES (cont.)
  7. Using pliers, tighten all the couplings with an additional two–thirds turn.
    NOTE: Do not overtighten. Damage to the couplings may result.
  8. Turn the water faucet on.
  9. Check for leaks around the ‘’Y’’ connector, faucet, and hose couplings.

WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Hot and cold water faucets MUST be installed within 42 in. (107 cm) of your washer’s water inlet. The faucets MUST be 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) garden hose-type so inlet hoses can be
connected. Water pressure MUST be between 10 and 120 pounds per square inch. Your water department can advise you of your water pressure.
NOTE: A water softener is recommended to reduce the buildup of scale inside the steam generator if the home water supply is very hard.

CONNECTING A GAS DRYER (skip for electric dryers)

TOOLS YOU WILL NEED

MATERIALS YOU WILL NEED

  • Before beginning the installation, turn off the circuit breaker(s) or remove the dryer’s circuit fuse(s) at the electrical box. Be sure the dryer cord is unplugged from the wall.

  • Turn the dryer’s gas shut-off valve in the supply line to the OFF position.

  • Disconnect and discard old flexible gas connector and ducting material.

CONNECTING A GAS DRYER (cont.)
GAS REQUIREMENTS
WARNING Explosion Hazard

  • Use a new CSA International approved flexible gas supply line. Never reuse old flexible connectors.
  • Install an individual manual shut-off valve within6ft. of the dryer in accordance with the NationalFuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54.
  • Securely tighten all gas connections.
  • If connected to LP gas, have a qualified person make sure gas pressure DOES not exceed the 13” water column.
  • Examples of qualified people include licensed heating personnel, authorized gas company personnel, and authorized service personnel.
  • Failure to do so can result in death, explosion, or fire.
  • The installation must conform with local codes, or in the absence of local codes, with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54, or the Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, CSA B149.1.

DRYER GAS SUPPLY CONNECTION

GAS SUPPLY

  • A 1/8” National Pipe Taper thread plugged tapping, accessible for test gauge connection, must be installed immediately upstream of the gas supply connection to the dryer. Contact your local gas utility should you have questions on the installation of the plugged tapping.
  • The supply line is to be 1/2” rigid pipe and equipped with an accessible shutoff within 6 feet of, and in the same room with, the dryer.
  • Use pipe thread compound appropriate for natural or LP gas or use PTFE tape.
  • Connect flexible metal connector to dryer and gas supply.

WARNING – Fire Hazard
FOR USE WITH NATURAL GAS ONLY
A dryer as produced by the manufacturer is to be used only with a natural gas supply. A manufacturer-supplied conversion kit is required to convert this dryer for propane gas supply. Use propane gas conversion kit WE25X217. The conversion must be made by properly trained and qualified personnel in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

ADJUSTING FOR ELEVATION
• Gas clothes dryers input ratings are based on sea-level operation and need not be adjusted for operation at or below 2000 ft. elevation. For operation at elevations above 2000 ft., input ratings should be reduced at a rate of 4 percent for each 1000 ft. above sea level.
• Installation must conform to local codes and ordinances or, in their absence, the NATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, ANSI Z223.

WARNING – Fire Hazard
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly could result in serious injury, death, or property damage. DO NOT install a booster fan in the exhaust duct. Install all clothes dryers in accordance with the installation instructions of the manufacturer of the dryer.

CONNECTING A GAS DRYER (cont.)
CONNECTING THE DRYER TO THE GAS SUPPLY
Install a female 3/8” NPT elbow at the end of the dryer gas inlet. Install a 3/8” flare union adapter to the female elbow.
IMPORTANT: Use a pipe wrench to securely hold on to the end of the dryer gas inlet to prevent twisting the inlet.
NOTE: Apply pipe compound or PTFE tape to the threads of the adapter and dryer gas inlet.

Attach the flexible metal gas line connector to the adapter.
Tighten the flexible gas line connection, using two adjustable wrenches.
CONNECTING THE DRYER TO THE GAS SUPPLY (cont.)

Install a 1/8” NPT plugged tapping to the dryer gas line shut-off valve for checking gas inlet pressure.  Install a flare union adapter to the plugged tapping.
NOTE: Apply pipe compound or PTFE tape to the threads of the adapter and plug tapping.

E   Tighten all connections, using two adjustable wrenches. Do not overtighten.
F   Open the gas shut-off valve.
CONNECTING A GAS DRYER (cont.)
TEST FOR LEAKS
Never use an open flame to test for gas leaks.

Check all connections for leaks with soapy solution or equivalent. Apply a soap solution. The leak test solution must not contain ammonia, which could cause damage to the
brass fittings. If leaks are found, close the valve, retighten the joint and repeat the soap test.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION FOR GAS DRYERS

WARNING – Electrical Shock Hazard
Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.
DO NOT remove the ground prong.
DO NOT use an adapter.
DO NOT use an extension cord.
Failure to do so can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.

  • Circuit – Individual properly polarized and grounded 15 or 20 amp circuit breaker or time-delay fuse.
  • Power Supply – 2-wire plus ground, 120 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz, alternating current.
  • Outlet Receptacle – Properly grounded 3-prong receptacle to be located so the power cord is accessible when the dryer is in an installed position. If a 2-prong receptacle is
    present, it is the owner’s responsibility to have a licensed electrician replace it with a properly grounded 3-prong grounding-type receptacle.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION FOR GAS DRYERS (cont.)

  • The dryer must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes and ordinances, or in the absence of local codes, with the latest edition of the NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA NO. 70 or CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE, CSA C22.1. Check with a licensed electrician if you are not sure that the dryer is properly grounded.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This dryer must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This dryer uses a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.

WARNING
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician, or service representative or personnel, if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance is properly grounded. DO NOT modify the plug on the power supply cord. If it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

  • If required by local codes, an external 18 gauge or larger copper ground wire (not provided) may be added. Attach to dryer cabinet with a #8-18 x 1/2” sheet metal screw (available at any hardware store) to the rear of the dryer as illustrated.

CONNECTING AN ELECTRIC DRYER

(Skip for gas dryers and if your dryer already has a power cord attached)
TOOLS YOU WILL NEED

MATERIALS YOU WILL NEED

Before making the electrical connection, turn off the circuit breaker(s) or remove the dryer’s circuit fuse(s) at the electrical box. Be sure the dryer cord is unplugged from the wall. NEVER LEAVE THE ACCESS COVER OFF THE TERMINAL BLOCK.

POWER CORDS

GE Appliances strongly recommends the use of factory-specified parts. Select the power cord to fit your installation requirements.
NOTE: If your dryer circuit is on a circuit protected by a GFCI breaker, then 3-wire installation is not permitted. House wiring and dryer must be configured for 4-wire.

Part Number  Type Length  Amperage
WX9X2 3-Prong 4 Feet 30
WX9X3 3-Prong 5 Feet 30
WX9X4 3-Prong 6 Feet 30
WX9X18 4-Prong 4 Feet 30
WX9X19 4-Prong 5 Feet 30
WX9X20 4-Prong 6 Feet 30

Order online at GEApplianceparts.com, 24 hours a day or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours.

CONNECTING AN ELECTRIC DRYER

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION FOR ELECTRIC DRYERS
For electrical connections using a power cord:
NOTE: If your dryer circuit is on a circuit protected by a GFCI breaker, then 3-wire installation is not permitted. House wiring and dryer must be configured for 4-wire.

WARNING – Fire Hazard 

Use a new UL-listed 240V 30 amp dryer power supply cord with closed ring terminals or spade terminals with upturned ends. Use a UL-listed strain relief. Disconnect power before making electrical connections. Connect neutral wire (white or center wire) to the center terminal. Ground wire (green or bare wire) must be connected to a green ground connector. Connect the remaining two supply wires to the remaining two terminals. Securely tighten all electrical connections. Replace the terminal block cover. Failure to do so can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
For a grounded, cord-connected dryer: This dryer must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This dryer uses a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.

WARNING
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician, service representative, or personnel, if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance is properly grounded. DO NOT modify the plug on the power supply cord. If it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION FOR ELECTRIC DRYERS
For direct wire connections:
WARNING – Fire Hazard 

Use 10 gauge solid copper wire. Use a UL-listed strain relief. Disconnect power before making electrical connections. Connect neutral wire (white or center wire) to the center
terminal.  Ground wire (green or bare wire) must be connected to a green ground connector. Connect the remaining two supply wires to the remaining two terminals. Securely tighten all electrical connections. Replace the terminal block cover. Failure to do so can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
For a permanently connected dryer: This the dryer must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system or an equipment grounding conductor must be run with
the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment grounding terminal on the appliance.
WARNING
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician, service representative, or personnel, if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance is properly grounded.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

CONNECTING DRYER USING 4-WIRE CONNECTION (MUST BE USED FOR MOBILE HOME INSTALLATION)

NOTE: Since January 1, 1996, the National Electrical Code requires that new constructions use a 4-wire connection to an electric dryer. A 4-wire cord must also be used where local codes do not permit grounding through the neutral. The 3-wire connection is NOT for use on new construction.

  1. Turn off the circuit breaker(s) (30 amp) or remove the dryer’s circuit fuse at the electrical box.
  2. Be sure the dryer cord is unplugged from the wall receptacle.
  3. Remove the power cord cover located at the lower back.
  4. Remove and discard ground strap. Keep the green ground screw for Step 7.
  5. Install 3/4 in. UL-recognized strain relief to power cord entry hole. Bring power cord through the strain relief.
  6. Connect power cord as follows:
    A. Connect the 2 hotlines to the outer screws of the terminal block (marked L1 and L2).
    B. Connect the neutral (white) line to the center of the terminal block (marked N).
  7. Attach ground wire of power cord with the green ground screw (hole above strain relief bracket). Tighten all terminal block screws (3) securely.
  8. The properly secure power cord to strain relief.
  9. Reinstall the cover.
    NEVER LEAVE THE COVER OFF OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK.

CONNECTING DRYER USING 3-WIRE CONNECTION
NOTE: If your dryer circuit is on a circuit protected by a GFCI breaker, then 3-wire installation is not permitted. House wiring and dryer must be configured for 4-wire. If required, by local code, install external ground (not provided) to a grounded metal, cold water pipe, or other established ground determined by a qualified electrician.

3-wire Connection
NOT for use in Canada.
DO NOT use for Mobile Home Installations.
NOT for use on new construction.
NOT for use on recreational vehicles.
NOT for use in areas where local codes prohibit grounding through neutral conduction.

  1. Turn off the circuit breaker(s) (30 amp) or remove the dryer’s circuit fuse at the electrical box.
  2. Be sure the dryer cord is unplugged from the wall receptacle.
  3. Remove power cord cover located at the lower back.
  4. Install 3/4-in. UL-recognized strain relief to power cord entry hole. Bring power cord through the strain relief.
  5. Connect power cord as follows:
    A. Connect the 2 hotlines to the outer screws of the terminal block (marked L1 and L2).
    B. Connect the neutral (white) line to the center of the terminal block (marked N).
  6. Be sure ground strap is connected to a neutral (center) terminal of block and to the green ground screw on the cabinet rear. Tighten all terminal block screws (3) securely.
  7. The properly secure power cord to strain relief.
  8. Reinstall the cover.
    NEVER LEAVE THE COVER OFF OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK.

EXHAUSTING THE DRYER

WARNING – Fire Hazard 

This dryer MUST be vented to the outdoors. Use only 4” rigid metal ducting for the home exhaust duct. Use only 4” rigid metal or UL-listed dryer transition duct to connect the dryer to the home exhaust.
DO NOT use a plastic vent.
DO NOT exhaust into a chimney, kitchen exhaust, gas vent, wall, ceiling, attic, crawl space, or concealed space of a building.
DO NOT install a screen in or over the exhaust duct.
DO NOT install a booster fan in the exhaust duct.
DO NOT use duct longer than specified in the exhaust length table. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or fire.
TOOLS AND MATERIALS YOU WILL NEED TO INSTALL EXHAUST DUCT

PARTS AVAILABLE FROM GEAPPLIANCEPARTS.COM OR LOCAL SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS
PM8X85 Outdoor exhaust hood
PM08X10085 8’ Flexible metal clothes dryer transition duct with 2 clamps
WX08X10130 4” Dryer exhaust clamp
WE49X22606 Rear exhaust opening cover, for side or bottom, vented dryers

CONNECTING THE DRYER TO HOUSE VENT
RIGID METAL TRANSITION DUCT

  • For best drying performance, a rigid metal transition duct is recommended.
  • Rigid metal transition ducts reduce the risk of crushing and kinking.

UL-LISTED FLEXIBLE METAL CLOTHES DRYER TRANSITION DUCT

  • If rigid metal cannot be used, then the UL-listed flexible metal clothes dryer transition duct (GE Appliances part – PM08X10085) can be used.
  • Never install transition duct in walls, ceilings, floors, or other enclosed spaces.
  • The total length of the transition duct should not exceed 8’ (2.4 m).
  • For many applications, installing elbows at both the dryer and the wall is highly recommended (see illustrations in the next section). Elbows allow the dryer to sit close to the wall without kinking and/or crushing the transition duct, maximizing drying performance.
  • Avoid resting the duct on sharp objects.

UL-LISTED FLEXIBLE METAL (FOIL-TYPE) TRANSITION DUCT

  • In special installations, it may be necessary to connect the dryer to the home exhaust vent using flexible metal (foil-type) transition duct. UL– LISTED universal flexible dryer transition duct (GE Appliances parts – PM8X73 or WX8X73) may be used ONLY in installations where rigid metal or flexible metal transition ducting cannot be used AND where a 4” diameter can be maintained throughout the entire length of the transition duct.
  • In Canada and the United States, only transition ducts that comply with “UL 2158A STANDARD FOR CLOTHES DRYER TRANSITION DUCT” shall be used.
  • Avoid resting the duct on sharp objects.
  • For best drying performance:
  1. Slide one end of the duct over the clothes dryer outlet pipe.
  2. Secure the duct with a clamp.
  3. With the dryer in its permanent position, extend the duct to its full length. Allow 2” of duct to overlap the exhaust pipe. Cut off and remove the excess duct. Keep the duct as straight as possible for maximum airflow.
  4. Secure the duct to the exhaust pipe with the other clamp.
• DO cut duct as short as possible and install straight into wall. • DO use elbows when turns are
necessary.
• DO NOT bend or collapse ducting. Use elbows if turns are necessary.
• DO NOT use excessive exhaust length. Cut duct as short as possible.
• DO NOT crush duct against the wall.
• DO NOT set dryer on the duct.

EXHAUST LENGTH
Using exhaust longer than specified length will:

  • Increase the drying times and the energy cost.
  • Reduce the dryer life.
  • Accumulate lint, creating a potential fire hazard.
    The correct exhaust installation is YOUR
    RESPONSIBILITY.
    Problems due to incorrect installation are not
    covered by the warranty.
    The MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE length of the exhaust system depends upon the type of duct, number of turns, the type of exhaust hood (wall cap) and all conditions noted on the chart.
  • Internal elbows added for side or bottom vent conversions must be included in the total elbow count.
  • Any elbow greater than 45° should be treated as a 90° elbow; one elbow of 45° or less may be ignored.
  • Two 45° elbows will be treated like one 90° elbow.
  • For the side exhaust installations, add one 90° elbow to the chart.
  • For every additional 90° elbow, reduce the allowable vent system length by 10 feet.
  • When calculating the total vent system length, you must add all the straight portions and elbows of the system (including the transition duct).

RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM LENGTH
Exhaust Hood Types

Recommended Use only for short-run installations
No. of 90° Elbows Rigid Metal Rigid Metal
0 120 Feet 90 Feet
1 100 Feet 75 Feet
2 85 Feet 65 Feet
3 70 Feet 55 Feet
4 60 Feet 45 Feet
5 55 Feet 35 Feet

EXHAUST SYSTEM CHECKLIST
HOOD OR WALL CAP

  • Terminate in a manner to prevent backdrafts or entry of birds or other wildlife.
  • Termination should present minimal resistance to the exhaust airflow and should require little or no maintenance to prevent clogging.
  • Wall caps must be installed at least 12” above ground level or any other obstruction with the opening pointed down.
    SEPARATION OF TURNS
  • For best performance, separate all turns by at least 4 ft. of straight duct, including the distance between the last turn and dampened exhaust hood (wall cap).
    SEALING OF JOINTS
  • All joints should be tight to avoid leaks. The male end of each section of the duct must point away from the dryer.
  • Duct joints should be made air- and moisture-tight by wrapping the overlapped joints with duct tape or aluminum tape.
  • Do not assemble ductwork with any fasteners that extend into the duct. These fasteners can accumulate lint, creating a potential fire hazard.
  • Horizontal runs should slope down towards the outdoors 1/4” per foot.
  • Provide access for inspection and cleaning of the exhaust system, especially at turns and joints. The exhaust system shall be inspected and cleaned at least once a year.
    INSULATION
  • The ductwork that runs through an unheated area or is near air conditioning should be insulated to reduce condensation and lint build-up.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

  • Remove and discard existing plastic or metal foil duct and replace with UL-listed duct.
  • Remove any lint from the wall exhaust opening.

STANDARD REAR EXHAUST
We recommend that you install your dryer before installing your washer. This will permit direct access for easier exhaust connection. Slide the end of the exhaust duct on the back of the dryer and secure it with duct tape or a hose clamp.

NOTE: We strongly recommend using a rigid metal exhaust duct. However, if flexible ducting is used it must be UL-Listed metal, not plastic.

  • For straight-line installation, connect the dryer exhaust to the external exhaust hood using duct tape or clamp.

RECOMMENDED CONFIGURATION TO MINIMIZE EXHAUST BLOCKAGE
Using duct elbows will prevent duct kinking and collapsing.

SIDE OR BOTTOM VENTING
WARNING – Fire Hazard 

Disconnect the dryer from the electrical supply. Wear gloves and arm guards. Close the back opening with a cover plate (Kit WE49X22606). Failure to do so may result in fire, electrical shock, or lacerations.
Dryer Exhaust to right of the cabinet for Electric models only. Dryer Exhaust to the left of the cabinet for Gas and Electric models. Dryer Exhaust to the bottom of the cabinet for Gas and Electric models.

Detach and remove the right (electric models only), left or bottom knockout as desired. Remove the screw inside the dryer exhaust duct and save. Pull the duct out of the dryer.
Cut the duct as shown and keep portion A.

For models GTD60, GTD65 and GTD68 only, use the dimension below:

SIDE OR BOTTOM VENTING (cont.) TAB LOCATION

Through the rear opening, locate the tab in the middle of the appliance base. Lift the tab to about 45°, using a flat-blade screwdriver.
ADDING A NEW DUCT

Reconnect the cut portion (A) of the duct to the blower housing. Make sure that the shortened duct is aligned with the tab in the base. Use the screw saved previously to secure the duct in place through the tab on the appliance base.

ADDING ELBOW AND DUCT FOR EXHAUST TO RIGHT (ELECTRIC MODELS ONLY) OR LEFT SIDE OF CABINET

  • Preassemble 4” elbow with 4” duct. Wrap duct tape around the joint.
  • Insert duct assembly, elbow first, through the side opening, and connect the elbow to the dryer internal duct.
    Be sure not to pull or damage the electrical wires inside the dryer when inserting the duct.

SIDE OR BOTTOM VENTING (cont.)
ADDING ELBOW AND DUCT FOR EXHAUST TO LEFT OR RIGHT SIDE OF CABINET (cont.)

  • Apply duct tape as shown on the joint between the dryer internal duct and the elbow, and also the joint between the elbow and the side duct.

Use 4” rigid metal ducting only inside the dryer. Internal duct joints must be secured with tape, otherwise, they may separate and cause a safety hazard.

ADDING ELBOW FOR EXHAUST THROUGH BOTTOM OF CABINET

  • Insert the elbow through the rear opening and connect it to the dryer internal duct.
  • Apply duct tape as shown on the joint between the dryer internal duct and the elbow, and also the joint between the elbow and the bottom duct.

Internal duct joints must be secured with tape; otherwise, they may separate and cause a safety hazard.

ADDING COVER PLATE TO REAR OF CABINET

Connect standard metal elbows and ducts to complete the exhaust system. Cover back opening with the plate (Kit WE49X22606) which can be purchased from GEApplianceparts.com or a local service provider. Place dryer in final location.
NEVER LEAVE THE BACK OPENING WITHOUT THE PLATE. (Kit WE49X22606)

LEVEL THE DRYER
Stand the dryer upright near the final location and adjust the leveling legs at the corners to ensure the dryer is level side-to-side and front-to-back. Then, adjust the two anti-tip
legs at the front inner corners, taking care that they are touching the floor to avoid unit tip over. The installation is not complete until this process is finished.
PLUG DRYER IN
DRYER START-UP

Press the Start button.
NOTE: If the dryer has been exposed to temperatures below freezing for an extended period of time, allow it to warm up before pressing Start. Otherwise, the display will not come on. The dryer is now ready for use. (appearance will vary)

WARNING – Electrical Shock Hazard
Disconnect power supply before servicing. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock.
WARNING – Shock Hazard
Certain internal parts are intentionally not grounded and may present a risk of electric shock only during servicing. Service personnel – DO NOT contact the following parts while the appliance is energized: drum light, door switch, igniter, thermostats, flame detector, or mica heater.

REVERSING THE DOOR

ABOUT REVERSING THE DOOR IMPORTANT NOTES:

  • Read the instructions all the way through before starting.
  • Handle parts carefully to avoid scratching the paint.
  • Set screws down by their related parts to avoid using them in the wrong places.
  • Provide a non-scratch work surface for the door.
  • The normal completion time to reverse the door swing is 30–60 minutes.
    IMPORTANT:
    Once you begin, do not move the cabinet until the door swing reversal is completed. These instructions are for changing the hinges from the right side to the left side – if you ever want to switch them back to the right side, follow these same instructions and reverse all references to the left and right.

Tools needed:
Quadrex #1-bit screwdriver otherwise standard #2 Phillips screwdriver Tape-tipped putty knife Small flat blade screwdriver
Before you start
Unplug the dryer from its electrical outlet

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - power3

Choose the REVERSING THE DOOR instructions A or B for your model.
A REVERSING THE DOOR – SOLID DOOR MODELS
Open the door approximately 130 degrees. With a putty knife, remove the 4 plastic caps located along the left side of the front panel and set them aside.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - aside

REVERSING THE DOOR – SOLID DOOR MODELS (cont.)
Remove the bottom screw from each hinge (right side) and partially insert them into each top hinge hole on the left side.
NOTE: All 4 front panel hinge screws will now be in the top hinge holes – 2 on the left and 2 on the right.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - DOOR

3  Loosen each top hinge screw on the right side. Remove the door and place it on a protective flat surface to avoid any damage.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - damage2

Remove both the blind plate and the striker plate/ metal striker and install them in opposite positions

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - positions

REVERSING THE DOOR – SOLID DOOR MODELS (cont.)

GTX52 model only: Remove 2 hinges and 8 screws (4 for the hinges and 4 for the outer door). Remove the inner door by lifting it up, using a flat blade screwdriver, and out.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - SOLID DOOR

GTX52 model only: Flip the inner door over. Remove the dock by squeezing its tabs and pulling it out. Remove the latch catch by sliding down and pulling it out. Switch and install in the opposite positions.GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - positions2

GTX52 model only: Flip the inner door back over and rotate it 180°. Replace it back into the outer door. Replace the 2 hinges and 8 screws (4 for the hinges and 4 for the outer door).

Mount the door on the 2 upper left side hinge screws installed in step 2. Move the hinge screws loosened in step 3 into the lower left side screw holes and firmly tighten all 4 screws.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - tighten

Install the 4 plastic caps removed in step 1 into the 4 right-side front panel holes.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - panel

NOTE: To return the door to the original setup, follow these instructions, swapping “left” and “right”.
When you finish
Plug the dryer back into its electrical outlet.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - outlet

REVERSING THE DOOR – GLASS PANEL DOOR MODELS

1 Open the door approximately 130 degrees. With a putty knife, remove the 4 plastic caps located along the left side of the front panel and set them aside.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - aside

Remove the bottom screw from each hinge (right side) and partially insert them into each top hinge hole on the left side.
NOTE: All 4 front panel hinge screws will now be in the top hinge holes – 2 on the left and 2 on the right.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - hinge holes

Loosen each top hinge screw on the right side. Remove the door and place it on a protective flat surface to avoid any damage.

REVERSING THE DOOR – GLASS PANEL DOOR MODELS (cont.)

Remove both the blind plate and the striker plate and install them in the opposite positions.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - opposite

Remove the 4 door hinge screws, 6 inside screws, and 2 pocket screws. Lift the inner door upwards using a flat blade screwdriver.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - upwards

B REVERSING THE DOOR – GLASS PANEL DOOR MODELS (cont.)
6 Remove and swap the 2 plastic caps and the 2 hinges.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - hinges

Rotate the outer door 180 degrees, mount the inner door back into the outer door frame, and secure with the screws removed in step 5. Make sure you mount the hinges on the side opposite the pocket.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - pocket

REVERSING THE DOOR – GLASS PANEL DOOR MODELS (cont.)

Mount the assembled door on the 2 upper left side hinge screws installed in step 2. Move the hinge screws loosened in step 2 into the lower left side screw holes and firmly tighten all 4 screws.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - screws

Install the 4 plastic caps removed in step 1 into the 4 right-side front panel holes.

GE Appliances GTX33GASKWW Dryers - front panel2

NOTE: To return the door to the original setup, follow these instructions, swapping “left” and “right”.

When you finish
Plug the dryer back into its electrical outlet.

 

]]>
GE APPLIANCES JTS5000SNSS 30 Inch Electric Built-In Wall Ovens Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/jts5000snss-wall-ovens/ Sat, 24 Jun 2023 19:18:28 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=121751 Read More...

]]>

GE APPLIANCES JTS5000SNSS 30 Inch Electric Built-In Wall Ovens

OVERVIEW

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Read these instructions completely and carefully.

  • IMPORTANT: Save these instructions for the local inspector’s use.
  • IMPORTANT: Observe all governing codes and ordinances.
  • Note to Installer:” Be sure to leave these instructions with Consumer.
  •  Note to Consumer: Keep these instructions for future reference.
  •  Skill level: Installation of this appliance requires a qualified installer or electrician.
  •  Proper installation is the responsibility of the installer.
  •  Product failure due to improper installation is not covered under Warranty.
  •  The product is for indoor use only.

ATTENTION INSTALLER: All electric wall ovens must be hard-wired (direct-wired) into an approved junction box. A plug and receptacle is NOT permitted on these products.

FOR YOUR SAFETY:

WARNING
Before beginning the installation, switch power off at the service panel and lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a tag, to the service panel.
Be sure the oven is securely installed in a cabinet that is firmly attached to the house structure. Weight on the oven door could cause the oven to tip and result in injury. Never allow anyone to climb, sit, stand, or hang on the oven door.
Make sure the wall coverings, counters, and cabinets around the oven can withstand the heat (up to 200°F [93.3°C]) generated by the oven.

MATERIALS YOU MAY NEED
Junction Box
Wire Nuts
Strain Relief Clamp for 1/2” Conduit
36” (91 cm) of String

TOOLS YOU MAY NEED
1/8” Drill Bit and Electric or Hand Drill T20 Screwdriver
Phillips Screwdriver
Wire Strippers
7/16” Nut Driver (combination ovens) 1/4” Nut Driver (30” combination ovens)

 REMOVE PACKAGING MATERIALS

Failure to remove packaging materials could result in damage to the appliance. Remove all packing parts from the oven, racks, and heating elements. Remove protective film and labels on
the outer door and control panel. Also, remove the plastic on trims and panels, all tape around the oven, and any shipping screws securing the oven to the base pad. Open the oven door and remove the literature pack and oven racks. Remove the bottom trim from the top of the oven. It will be installed at the end of the installation process. The trim is wrapped separately and taped to the top of the unit. Remove pedestal rails from the separate boxes and set them aside (30” Double Wall Ovens Only). Consider recycling options for your appliance packaging material.

DESIGN INFORMATION
SINGLE OVEN INSTALLATIONS
The single oven may be installed in a cabinet alone or above a warming drawer. The single oven may also be installed side by side, below a countertop, or below specified cooktops. See the label on top of the oven for approved models.

DOUBLE AND COMBINATION OVEN INSTALLATIONS
A double or combination oven may be installed in a cabinet alone or above a warming drawer. See the label on top of the oven for approved models.

IMPORTANT: Always refer to individual installation instructions packed with each product for specific requirements.

PREPARE THE OPENING

NOTE: If the cabinet does not have a solid bottom, two braces or runners must be installed to support the weight of the oven. For single ovens, the runners and braces must support 220 lbs (99 kg). For double and combination ovens, the runners and braces must support 400 lbs. (181 kg).
NOTE: If marks, blemishes, or the cutout opening are visible above the installed oven, it may be necessary to add wood shims under the runners until the marks or opening are covered.
NOTE: If the cabinet does not have a front frame and the sides are less than ¾” (1.9 cm) thick, shim both sides equally to establish the cutout width.

CUTOUT FOR SINGLE OVENS IN-WALL CABINET
NOTE:
If the cabinet does not have a front frame and the sides are less than ¾” (1.9 cm) thick, shim both sides equally to establish the cutout width.

Dimension Dimension Description 27” Single Oven 30” Single Oven
A Cabinet Width 27” (68.6 cm) 30” (76.2 cm)
B Cutout Width 25” (63.5 cm) min.

251»4” (64.1 cm) max.

281»2” (72.4 cm) min.

285»8” (72.7 cm) max.

C Cutout Height 275»8” (70.2 cm) min.

281»8” (71.4 cm) max.

271»4” (69.2 cm) min.

275»16” (69.4 cm) max.

D Clearance from cutout – side edges* 1” (2.5 cm) 11»16” (1.75 cm)
E Clearance to Adjacent Corners, Drawers, Walls, etc., When Door Is Open 23” (50.8 cm) min. 23” (53.3 cm) min.
F Clearance from cutout – top* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 1” (2.5 cm) min.

(11»4” (3.2 cm) for PT9050, ZET1S and ZET1P)

G Clearance from cutout – bottom* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 11»4” (3.2 cm)
H Junction Box Location 83»4” (22.2 cm) max.

right side only

91»2” (24.1 cm) max.

right side only

P Junction Box location 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max. 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max.
R Junction Box location 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max. 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max.

 

NOTE: These ovens are only approved to be installed under the specific models as labeled on the unit.

NOTE: One cooktop may be centered over either oven in the side-by-side installation.

Dimension Dimension Description 27” Single Oven 30” Single Oven
A Cabinet Width 25” (63.5 cm) min.

251»4” (64.1 cm) max.

281»2” (72.4 cm) min.

285»8” (72.7 cm) max.

B Cutout Height 275»8” (70.2 cm) min.

281»8” (71.4 cm) max.

271»4” (69.2 cm) min.

275»16” (69.4 cm) max.

C Clearance from cutout – top* 1” (2.5 cm) 1” (2.5 cm)

(11»4” (3.2 cm) for PT9050

ZET1S and ZET1P)

D Clearance from cutout – bottom* 1” (2.5 cm) 11»4” (3.2 cm)
E Clearance from cutout – side edges* 1” (2.5 cm) 11»16” (1.75 cm)
F Junction Box Location 83»4” (22.2 cm) max.

right side only

91»2” (24.1 cm) max.

right side only

CUTOUT FOR DOUBLE OVENS (2 THERMAL OVENS)

NOTE: If the cabinet does not have a front frame and the sides are less than ¾” (1.9 cm) thick, shim both sides equally to establish the cutout width.

Dim. Description 27” Double Oven 30” Double Oven with Pedestal 30” Double Oven without Pedestal
A Cabinet Width 27” (68.6 cm) 30” (76.2 cm) 30” (76.2 cm)
B Cutout Width 25” (63.5 cm) min.

251»4” (64.1 cm) max.

281»2” (72.4 cm) min.

285»8” (72.7 cm) max.

281»2” (72.4 cm) min.

285»8” (72.7 cm) max.

C Cutout Height 4911»16” (126.2 cm) min.

501»8” (127.3 cm) max.

5113»16” (131.6 cm) min.

5115»16” (131.9 cm) max.

50 ¼” (127.64cm)
D Clearance from cutout – side edges* 1” (2.5 cm) 11»16” (1.75 cm) 11»16” (1.75 cm)
E Clearance to Adjacent Corners, Drawers, Walls, etc., When Door Is Open 23” (50.8 cm) min. 23” (53.3 cm) min. 23” (53.3 cm) min.
F Clearance from cutout – top* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 1” (2.5 cm) min.

(11»4” (3.2 cm) for PT9550, ZET2S and ZET2P)

1” (2.5 cm) min.

(11»4” (3.2 cm) for PT9550, ZET2S and ZET2P)

G Clearance from cutout – bottom* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 11»4” (3.2 cm) 11»4” (3.2 cm)
H Junction Box Location 83»4” (22.2 cm) max.

right side only

91»2” (24.1 cm) max. right side only 91»2” (24.1 cm) max. right side only
K Recommended Cutout Location from Floor 131»4” (33.7 cm) 12” (30.5 cm) 12” (30.5 cm)
P Junction Box location 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max. 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max. 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max.
R Junction Box location 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max. 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max. 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max.

D CUTOUT FOR COMBINATION OVENS (WITH UPPER MICROWAVE OVEN)

NOTE: If the cabinet does not have a front frame and the sides are less than ¾” (1.9 cm) thick, shim both sides equally to establish the cutout width.

Dim. Description 27” Oven with Microwave 30” Oven with Microwave
A Cabinet Width 27” (68.6 cm) 30” (76.2 cm)
B Cutout Width 25” (63.5 cm) min.

251»4” (64.1 cm) max.

281»2” (72.4 cm) min.

285»8” (72.7 cm) max.

C Cutout Height 411»8” (104.5 cm) min.

411»4” (104.8 cm) max.

423»16” (107.2 cm) min.

421»4” (107.3 cm) max.

D Clearance from cutout – side edges* 1” (2.5 cm) 11»16” (1.75 cm)
E Clearance to Adjacent Corners, Drawers, Walls, etc., When Door Is Open 23” (58.4 cm) min. 23” (58.4 cm)
F Clearance from cutout – top* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 1” (2.5 cm) min.
G Clearance from cutout – bottom* 1” (2.5 cm) min. 11»4” (3.2 cm)
H Junction Box Location 83»4” (22.2 cm) max.

right side only

91»2” (24.1 cm) max.

right side only

P Junction Box location 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max. 5-1/4” (13.34 cm) max.
R Junction Box location 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max. 2-1/2” (6.35 cm) max.

E SECURING UPPER MICROWAVE/ADVANTI UM OVEN  TO CABINET

For a double oven with microwave or Advantium upper ovens. Secure a wooden cleat to the side of the cabinet so that the upper oven can be secured to the cleat with provided screws

27” Cabinet requirements 

  •  No shims (or cleats) are required when the cabinet is in minimum width condition.
  •  If the cabinet is at maximum width condition, add wood shims to bring the cabinet to minimum condition.
  •  30” Cabinet requirements
  • No shims (or cleats) are required when the cabinet is in minimum width condition.
  •  If the cabinet is in maximum width condition, fix the wood cleats as shown in the illustration.

 CUTOUT FOR INSTALLATION OVER A  WARMING DRAWER

NOTE: Install the oven only with specific models listed on the label located on top of the oven.
NOTE: Additional clearances between cutouts may be required. Check to be sure the oven supports above the Warming Drawer location do not obstruct the required interior depth and height.
When installing a Warming Drawer below a single, double, or combination oven, a separate 120V, 60 HZ, properly grounded receptacle must be installed. Refer to installation instructions packed with the Warming Drawer for specific installation requirements.

Continue to Section 3 for Double Wall Oven with Pedestal. Otherwise, continue to Section 4.

DETERMINING WHEN TO USE THE PEDESTAL (30” DOUBLE OVENS ONLY) 

WHEN TO USE THE PEDESTAL
When replacing an older GE Appliances 30” double wall oven with a new GE Appliances model. Cutout height = 51-13/16” to 51-15/16”. This is our traditional cutout height.

WHEN NOT TO USE THE PEDESTAL
When replacing a 30” double wall oven from another manufacturer (ie. Whirlpool) with a new GE Appliances 30” double wall oven. Cutout height = 50-1/4”. You will need to verify that the existing cutout matches the 50-1/4” dimension.
If the new GE Appliances 30” double wall oven is being installed into new construction (ie. not a replacement), then the recommended installation is to use the Pedestal.

PEDESTAL RAIL INSTALLATION (30” DOUBLE OVENS ONLY)

  • A. Position the pedestal rails with the top cutout toward the front of the opening and the flanges on the bottom, pointing toward the center. Locate each rail on the floor or cabinet runner, slightly inward from the side of the cabinet. Make sure the front of each rail is not protruding beyond the front of the cabinet opening.
  •  Drill pilot holes and attach rails to the runner or bottom of the cabinet with provided hardware.

 DOOR REMOVAL (RECOMMENDED FOR THERMAL  OVENS)

WARNING:  The door for the microwave oven on a combination oven should never be removed, unless by a certified technician.
NOTE: Door removal is not a requirement for installation of the product but is an added convenience.
To remove the door:

  •  Open the oven door as far as it will go.
  • Remove hinge bracket, if equipped, from the front frame and set aside. Th hinge bracket must be replaced, if equipped, for proper door functionality when the door is reinstalled.
  •  Push both hinge locks down toward the door frame to the unlocked position. This may require a flat-blade screwdriver. DO NOT LIFT THE DOOR BY THE HANDLE!
  •  Place hands on both sides of the door and close the oven door to the removal position (approximately 1”–2” [2.5 cm–5.1 cm] from the closed position).
  •  Lift the door up and out until the hinge arms clear the slots. NOTE: The oven door is very heavy. Be sure you have a firm grip before lifting the oven door off the hinges. Use caution once the door is removed. Do not lay the door on its handle. This could cause dents or scratches.

SHIPPING SCREWS REMOVAL (FOR 30” COMBINATION OVEN UPPER OVEN ONLY)

Shipping screws must be removed as shown in the illustration. You will need a 1/4” Nut Driver.

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

WARNING
This appliance must be properly grounded.

WARNING
To prevent fire or shock, do not use an extension cord with this appliance.

WARNING
Improper connection of aluminum house wiring to copper leads can result in an electrical hazard or fire. Use only connectors designed for joining copper to aluminum and follow the manufacturer’s recommended procedure closely.
We recommend you have the electrical wiring and hookup of your appliance connected by a qualified electrician. After installation, have the electrician show you how to disconnect power from the appliance.
You must use a single-phase, 120/208 VAC or 120/240 VAC, 60 Hertz electrical system. If you connect to aluminum wiring, properly installed connectors approved for use with aluminum wiring must be used.
Effective January 1, 1996, the National Electrical Code requires that new construction (not existing) utilize a four-conductor connection to an electric oven. When installing an electric oven in new construction, a mobile home, a recreational vehicle, or an area where local codes prohibit grounding through the neutral conductor, refer to the section on four-conductor branch circuit connections.
Check with your local utilities for electrical codes which apply in your area. Failure to wire your oven according to governing codes could result in a hazardous condition. If there are no local codes, your oven must be wired and fused to meet the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70 – latest edition, available from the National Fire Protection Association.

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT.)
This appliance must be supplied with the proper voltage and frequency and connected to an individual, properly grounded branch circuit, protected by a circuit breaker or fuse. See the rating plate located on the oven frame to determine the rating of the product.

Use the chart below to determine the minimum recommended dedicated circuit protection:

KW Rating 240V KW Rating 208V Recommended Circuit Size (Dedicated)
”4.8 .: ”4.1 .: 20 Amp
4.9 KW–7.2 KW 4.2 KW–6.2 KW 30 Amp
7.3 KW–9.6 KW 6.3 KW–8.3 KW 40 Amp
9.7 KW–12.0 KW 8.4 KW–10.4 KW 50 Amp

DO NOT shorten the flexible conduit. The conduit strain relief clamp must be securely attached to the junction box and the flexible conduit must be securely attached to the clamp. If the flexible conduit will not fit within the clamp, do not install the oven until a clamp of the proper size is obtained.
The 3 power leads supplied with this appliance are suitable for connection to heavier gauge household wiring. The insulation of these 3 leads is rated for temperatures much higher than the temperature rating of the household wiring. The current-carrying capacity of the conductor is governed by the wire gauge and the temperature rating of the insulation around the wire.

MAKE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

WARNING
Switch power off at the service panel and lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a tag, to the service panel.
Place oven on table or platform even with the cutout opening. For a single oven, the platform must support 220 lbs. (99 kg); for a double or combination oven, the platform must support 400 lbs.
(181 kg). Connect the flexible conduit to the electrical junction box as shown below*. Position the conduit in such a manner that it will lie behind the unit in a natural loop when the oven is installed**. You will need to purchase an appropriate strain-relief clamp to complete the connection of the conduit to the junction box.

  •  Ovens come equipped with a 40” or 54” long conduit. If a longer conduit is desired, there may be one available for your model. To check availability or order parts, call GE Appliances at 1.800.GE.CARES.
  • Combination Oven with an upper microwave oven – it is recommended to install the conduit through the side of the junction box as shown in the illustration above.

THREE-CONDUCTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT CONNECTION 

NOTE: If residence leads are aluminum conductors, see
WARNING:  in Section 5, Electrical Requirements. When connecting to a three-conductor branch circuit, if local codes permit:

  •  Connect the oven ground conductor along with the neutral (white) lead to the branch circuit neutral (white or gray in color), using a wire nut.
  •  Connect the oven red lead to the branch circuit red lead and the oven black lead to the branch circuit black lead in accordance with local codes, using wire nuts.
  • Install proper strain relief clamp.
  •  Install junction box cover.

FOUR-CONDUCTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT CONNECTION

NOTE: If residence leads are aluminum conductors, see WARNING in Section 5, Electrical Requirements.

  • Free the neutral (white) lead from being restrained to any other wires. If necessary, cut the neutral (white) lead and then re-strip it to expose the proper length of the conductor.
  •  Attach the appliance grounding lead (green or bare copper) in accordance with local codes.
  •  Connect the oven neutral (white) lead to the branch circuit neutral (white or gray) in accordance with local codes, using a wire nut.
  •  Connect the oven red lead to the branch circuit red lead and the oven black lead to the branch circuit black lead in ac accordance with local codes, using wire nuts.
  •  Install proper strain relief clamp.
  •  Install junction box cover

 SLIDE OVEN INTO OPENING

  •  Loop (do not tie) a 36” (91 cm) string around the conduit before the oven is slid into place. This will keep the conduit from falling behind the oven.
  •  Lift oven into cabinet cutout using the oven opening as a grip. Carefully push against oven front frame. Do not push against outside edges.
  • As you slide the oven back, pull the string so that the conduit will lie on top of the oven in a natural loop. For a combination oven, pull the conduit so that it sits above the lower oven on the left side (as viewed from the front).
  •  When you are sure the conduit is out of the way, slide the oven ¾ way back into the opening. Remove the string by pulling on one end of the loop.

INSTALL MOUNTING SCREWS (UPPER OVEN ON COMBINATION OVENS)

  • Slide the oven the remaining way into the opening so that the side flanges and control panel are against the cabinet frame. Make sure that the oven is centered in the opening.
  •  Open the door, place a turntable tray in the oven and make sure that the tray in the unit is level.
  •  Drill pilot holes through the side flanges.
  •  Drive the color-matched screws into the side flanges. It is recommended that the screws be hand tightened.

INSTALL MOUNTING SCREWS (THERMAL OVENS) 

WARNING
Mounting screws must be used. Failure to do so could result in the oven falling out of the cabinet, causing serious injury.
NOTE: During the oven mounting step, ensure that no damage is done to the oven gasket which lines the edge of the oven cavity.
NOTE: Before drilling the pilot holes, make sure the oven is pushed as far back into the opening as it will go and is centered.
NOTE: If the cabinet is particle board, you must use #8 x ¾” particleboard screws. These may be purchased at any hardware store.

  • Drill through the mounting holes (top and bottom) of the side trim for the #8 mounting screws provided.
  •  Secure the oven cabinet with the screws provided.

Some models have custom handles. Please follow the instructions with the handles for proper installation.

BOTTOM TRIM INSTALLATION

With oven installed, attach the bottom trim through its mounting holes in the front vertical brace using two trim screws provided. The bottom trim lip must be placed under the flange of the bottom air duct.

IMPORTANT: If this unit is ever removed from the cabinet or the oven is ever pulled out for service, the bottom trim must be removed first or damage to the trim will occur.

OVEN RACK GUIDE INSTALLATION (IF APPLICABLE)

  • Locate included oven rack guide mounting hardware.
  •  Place oven rack guides on cavity wall studs with metal posts towards the back of cavity as shown.
  •  Install guides using the 8 provided mounting nuts.

REPLACING THE THERMAL OVEN DOOR

NOTE: The oven door is heavy. You may need help lifting the door high enough to slide it into the hinge slots. Do not lift the door by the handle.

  • Lift the oven door by grasping each side.
  • With the door at the same angle as the removal position (approximately 1”–2” [2.5 cm–5.1 cm] from the closed position), seat the notch of the hinge arm into the bottom edge of the hinge slot.
  • The notch of the hinge arm must be fully seated into the bottom of the slot.
  • Fully open the door. If the door will not fully open, the indentation is not seated correctly in the bottom edge of the slot.
  • . Push the hinge locks up against the front frame of the oven cavity, to the locked position.
  • Replace hinge bracket, if equipped, to ensure proper door functionality.
  •  Close the oven door.

FINAL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

  •  Check to make sure the circuit breaker is closed (RESET) or the circuit fuses are replaced.
  •  Be sure power is in service to the building.
  •  Check that all packing material and tape have been removed. Failure to remove these materials could result in damage to the appliance once the appliance has been turned on and surfaces have heated.
  •  Remove all items from inside the oven.
  •  Check to be sure that the mounting screws are installed and flush with the side trim
    (see Section 10).
  •  Check that the bottom trim is installed properly (see Section 11).
  •  Ensure that air duct opening at bottom of unit is free of obstructions.
  •  Check that oven rack guides (if applicable) are installed correctly and oven racks function smoothly.
  •  If applicable – install handles following handle installation instructions and check that both ends are secured.

OPERATION CHECKLIST

  • Turn on the power to the oven (refer to your Owner’s Manual). Verify that the bake and broil units and all cooking functions operate properly.
  •  See your Owner’s Manual for the troubleshooting list.
  •  Be sure all of the oven controls are OFF before leaving the oven.

]]>
GE APPLIANCES FCM7STWW 7.0 Cu. Ft. Manual Defrost Chest Freezer Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/fcm7stww-chest-freezer/ Wed, 28 Jun 2023 08:37:49 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=132153 Read More...

]]>
FCM7STWW 7.0 Cu. Ft. Manual Defrost Chest Freezer

View Fullscreen

CHEST FREEZERS

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .3
USING THE FREEZER . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Defrosting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
CARE AND CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . .7
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS. . . . . . .9
Normal Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . 10
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CONSUMER SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . 12

OWNER’S MANUAL AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
Manual Defrost Models:
FCM5, FCM7
ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ ESPAÑOL

Write the model and serial numbers here:
Model # _________________
Serial # _________________
You can find them on a plate on the top-center on the back of the unit.

49-1000422 Rev. 1 05-22 GEA

THANK YOU FOR MAKING GE APPLIANCES A PART OF YOUR HOME.
Whether you grew up with GE Appliances, or this is your first, we’re happy to have you in the family.
We take pride in the craftsmanship, innovation and design that goes into every GE Appliances product, and we think you will too. Among other things, registration of your appliance ensures that we
can deliver important product information and warranty details when you need them.
Register your GE appliance now online. Helpful websites and phone numbers are available in the Consumer Support section of this Owner’s Manual. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration
card included in the packing material.

2

49-1000422 Rev. 1

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THE APPLIANCE

WARNING To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or injury when using your freezer, follow
these basic safety precautions:

7 KLVIUHH]HUPXVWEHSURSHUOLQVWDOOHGDQGORFDWHGLQ 7 RSUHYHQWVXIIRFDWLRQDQGHQWUDSPHQWKD]DUGVWR

accordance with the Installation Instructions before it

children, remove the lid from any freezer before

is used.

disposing of it or discontinuing its use.

8 QSOXJWKHIUHH]HUEHIRUHPDNLQJUHSDLUVRU cleaning. NOTE: Power to the freezer cannot be disconnected by any setting on the control panel. NOTE: Repairs must be performed by a qualified Service Professional.
5 HSODFHDOOSDUWVDQGSDQHOVEHIRUHRSHUDWLQJ

7 RDYRLGVHULRXVLQMXURUGHDWKFKLOGUHQVKRXOGQRW stand on, or play in or with the appliance.
& KLOGUHQDQGSHUVRQVZLWKUHGXFHGSKVLFDOVHQVRU or mental capabilities or lack of experience and knowledge can use this appliance only if they are supervised or have been given instructions on safe use and understand the hazards involved.

. HHSIODPPDEOHPDWHULDOVDQGYDSRUVDZDIURPWKH freezer.
‘ RQRWVWRUHH[SORVLYHVXEVWDQFHVVXFKDVDHURVRO cans with a flammable propellant in this appliance.
‘ RQRWXVHDQH[WHQVLRQFRUG

7 KLVDSSOLDQFHLVLQWHQGHGWREHXVHGLQKRXVHKROG and similar applications such as: staff kitchen areas
LQVKRSVRIILFHVDQGRWKHUZRUNLQJHQYLURQPHQWV IDUPKRXVHVEFOLHQWVLQKRWHOVPRWHOVEHG
EUHDNIDVWDQGRWKHUUHVLGHQWLDOHQYLURQPHQWV catering and similar non-retail applications.

CAUTION To reduce the risk of injury when using your freezer, follow these basic safety precautions.

‘ RQRWFOHDQIUHH]HUZLWKZDUPZDWHUZKHQLWLV cold. Components may break if exposed to sudden temperature changes or impact, such as bumping or dropping.
. HHSILQJHUVRXWRIWKH³SLQFKSRLQW´DUHDV clearances between the lid and cabinet are necessarily small. Be careful closing lid when children are in the area.

‘ RQRWWRXFKWKHFROGVXUIDFHVLQWKHIUHH]HU compartment when hands are damp or wet, skin may stick to these extremely cold surfaces.
‘ RQRWUHIUHH]HIUR]HQIRRGVZKLFKKDYHWKDZHG completely.

WARNING

EXPLOSION HAZARD Flammable Refrigerant

This appliance contains isobutane refrigerant, also known as R600a, a natural gas with high environmental compatibility. However, it is also combustible. Adhere to the warnings below to reduce the risk of injury or property damage
1. When handling, installing and operating the

4. .HHSYHQWLODWLRQRSHQLQJVLQWKHDSSOLDQFH enclosures or in the built-in structure clear of obstruction.
5. To remove frost,scrape with a plastic or wood VSDWXODRUVFUDSHU’RQRWXVHDQLFHSLFNRUDPHWDO or sharp-edged instrument as it may puncture the

appliance, care should be taken to avoid damage to

freezer liner and then the flammable refrigerant

the refrigerant tubing.

tubing behind it.

2. Service shall only be performed by authorized
VHUYLFHSHUVRQQHO8VHRQOPDQXIDFWXUHUDXWKRUL]HG service parts.
3. ‘LVSRVHRIDSSOLDQFHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK)HGHUDO DQG/RFDO5HJXODWLRQV)ODPPDEOHUHIULJHUDQWDQG insulation material used require special disposal

6. ‘RQRWXVHHOHFWULFDODSSOLDQFHVLQVLGHWKHIRRG storage compartment of the appliance.
7. ‘RQRWXVHDQHOHFWULFDOGHYLFHWRGHIURVWRXU freezer.

procedures. Contact your local authorities for the

environmentally safe disposal of your appliance.

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

49-1000422 Rev. 1

3

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THE APPLIANCE

WARNING

FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD

.HHSIODPPDEOHPDWHULDOVDQGYDSRUVDZDIURPIUHH]HU)DLOXUHWRGRVRFDQUHVXOWLQILUHH[SORVLRQRUGHDWK

CONNECTING ELECTRICITY

WARNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Plug into a grounded 3-prong outlet.

‘RQRWUHPRYHWKHJURXQGSURQJ

‘RQRWXVHDQDGDSWHU

‘RQRWXVHDQH[WHQVLRQFRUG

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKHVHLQVWUXFWLRQVFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKILUHRUHOHFWULFDOVKRFN

Do not, under any circumstances, cut or remove the third (ground) prong from the power cord. For personal safety, this appliance must be properly grounded.

The power cord of this appliance is equipped with a 3-prong (grounding) plug which mates with a standard 3-prong (grounding) wall outlet to minimize the possibility of electric shock hazard from this appliance.
Have the wall outlet and circuit checked by a qualified electrician to make sure the outlet is properly grounded.
Where a standard 2-prong wall outlet is encountered, it is your personal responsibility and obligation to have it replaced with a properly grounded 3-prong wall outlet.
The freezer should always be plugged into its own individual electrical outlet which has a voltage rating that matches the rating plate.

A 115 Volt AC, 60 Hz, 15- or 20-amp fused, grounded electrical supply is required. This provides the best performance and also prevents overloading house wiring circuits which could cause a fire hazard from overheated wires.
Never unplug your freezer by pulling on the power cord. Always grip plug firmly and pull straight out from the outlet.
Immediately discontinue use of a damaged supply cord. If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by a qualified service professional with an authorized service part from the manufacturer.
When moving the freezer away from the wall, be careful not to roll over or damage the power cord.

PROPER DISPOSAL OF YOUR OLD APPLIANCE

WARNING SUFFOCATION AND ENTRAPMENT HAZARD

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKHVHGLVSRVDOLQVWUXFWLRQVFDQUHVXOW in death or serious injury
IMPORTANT: Child entrapment and suffocation are not problems of the past. Junked or abandoned appliances DUHVWLOOGDQJHURXVHYHQLIWKHZLOOVLWIRU³MXVWDIHZ GDV´,IRXDUHJHWWLQJULGRIRXUROGDSSOLDQFH please follow the instructions below to help prevent accidents.

Before You Throw Away Your Old Freezer: Take off the freezer lid.
Leave the baskets in place so that children may not easily climb inside.

Refrigerant and Foam Disposal:
‘LVSRVHRIDSSOLDQFHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK)HGHUDODQG/RFDO5HJXODWLRQV)ODPPDEOHUHIULJHUDQWDQGLQVXODWLRQ material used require special disposal procedures. Contact your local authorities for the environmentally safe disposal of your appliance.

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

4

49-1000422 Rev. 1

USING THE FREEZER

Using the Freezer

Starting the Freezer
1. Clean the inside of the freezer with a mild solution of baking soda and water (see Care and Cleaning).
2. Connect cord to power outlet.

3. Make sure the temperature control is set at 4.
4. Allow freezer to operate for at least 4 hours before placing food inside.

Temperature Control
)UHH]LQJWHPSHUDWXUHVHOHFWLRQLVPDGHEVHWWLQJWKH control from “Min” to “Max” (coldest) to.
If you want colder or warmer temperatures, adjust the control one step at a time.
Allow several hours after each one-step adjustment for the freezer temperature to stabilize.
7XUQLQJWKHFRQWUROWRWKH2))SRVLWLRQVWRSVWKHFRROLQJ process but does not shut off power to the freezer.

Power-On Light (on some models)
The Power-On Light indicates that the freezer is properly connected to the electrical power.
The light glows even when the temperature control is turned off.
Key-Ejecting Lock (on some models)
The lock is spring loaded so the key cannot be left in the lock. To lock or unlock, press the key in while turning. If the key is lost, contact your dealer for a replacement or go to GEApplianceParts.com. Always give the model and serial number of the freezer when requesting a replacement key.
WARNING
To prevent a child from being entrapped, keep the key out of reach of children and away from the freezer.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

5

USING THE FREEZER: ‘HIURVWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV

Defrosting Instructions

In most climates, defrosting will be necessary only about twice a year.
To have your freezer operate most efficiently, do not permit more than 1/2″ (13 mm) of frost to accumulate.

WARNING 5LVNRI¿UHRUH[SORVLRQ Flammable refrigerant used.
To remove frost,scrape with a plastic or wood spatula RUVFUDSHU’RQRWXVHDQLFHSLFNRUDPHWDORU sharp-edged instrument as it may puncture the freezer liner and then the flammable refrigerant tubing behind it.
‘RQRWXVHDQHOHFWULFDOGHYLFHWRGHIURVWRXU freezer.

For Complete Defrosting
7XUQWKHWHPSHUDWXUHFRQWUROWR2))VHWWLQJDQG unplug the freezer.
2. Remove all food and place it in corrugated boxes, LQVXODWHGEDJVSLFQLFFRROHUVHWF8VHWRZHOVDQG newspapers for insulation as needed.
3. With the door/lid open, use pans of hot water to speed loosening of frost. Remove large pieces before they melt.
Chest models have a defrost water drain at the front. Remove the defrost drain cap from the outside and the drain plug inside the cabinet.
NOTE: Water may drip from the back flange of the lid cover during defrosting. This is normal. Ice builds up in the lid insulation when the lid is open for adding or removing food, and melts during the defrosting operation.

4. Sponge excess water from the bottom of the freezer as it collects to prevent overflowing.
5. After defrosting, clean the inside of the freezer (see Care and Cleaning).
6. Replace the drain plug inside the cabinet and the cap RQWKHGHIURVWGUDLQ)ROGRYHUDQGGUWKHJDVNHWRQ the hinge side of the lid.
7. Plug in the freezer. Return the temperature control to its previous position and return food to the freezer.

6

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CARE AND CLEANING

Care And Cleaning

Cleaning Your Freezer
Outside. Protect the paint finish. The finish on the outside of the freezer is a high quality, baked-on paint finish. With proper care, it will stay new-looking and rust-free for years. Apply a coat of appliance polish wax when the freezer is new and then at least twice a year. Appliance polish wax also works well to remove tape residue from freezer surfaces.
Keep the finish clean. Wipe with a clean cloth lightly dampened with appliance polish wax or mild OLTXLGGLVKZDVKLQJGHWHUJHQW’UDQGSROLVKZLWK DFOHDQVRIWFORWK’RQRWZLSHWKHIUHH]HUZLWKD VRLOHGGLVKZDVKLQJFORWKRUZHWWRZHO’RQRWXVH scouring pads, powdered cleaners, bleach, or cleaners containing bleach.
NOTICE: Care should be taken in moving the freezer away from the wall. All types of floor coverings can be damaged, particularly cushioned coverings and those with embossed surfaces.

Inside. Clean the inside of your freezer at least once a year. We recommend that the freezer be unplugged before cleaning. If this is not practical, wring excess moisture out of sponge or cloth when cleaning in the vicinity of switches, lights or controls.
8VHZDUPZDWHUDQGEDNLQJVRGDVROXWLRQ±DERXWD tablespoon of baking soda to a quart of water. Rinse WKRURXJKOZLWKZDWHUDQGZLSHGU’RQRWXVH FOHDQLQJSRZGHUVRURWKHUDEUDVLYHFOHDQHUV’2127 wash removable parts in a dishwasher.
An open box of baking soda in the freezer will absorb stale freezer odors. Change the box every three months.

,Q&DVHRI([WHQGHG3RZHU)DLOXUH
.HHSIUHH]HUOLGFORVHG<RXUIUHH]HUZLOONHHSIRRG frozen for 24 hours provided warm air is not admitted.
,IIUHH]HULVRXWRIRSHUDWLRQIRUKRXUVRUPRUHDGG dry ice. Leave ice in large pieces. Add more ice as required.

CAUTION
Handling of dry ice can cause freezing of the hands–gloves or other protection is recommended.
,IGULFHLVQRWDYDLODEOHPRYHIRRGWRDIUR]HQIRRG locker temporarily–until power is restored.

Preparing to Move
‘LVFRQQHFWWKHSRZHUFRUGSOXJIURPWKHZDOORXWOHW Remove foods, defrost and clean the freezer.
Secure all loose items such as baskets by taping them securely in place to prevent damage.

Be sure freezer stays in upright position during actual moving and during transportation. The freezer must be secured during transportation to prevent movement. Protect outside of freezer with blanket.

Preparing for Vacation
To maintain freezer in operation during vacations, EHVXUHRXUKRXVHSRZHULVQRWWXUQHGRII)RUVXUH protection of freezer contents, you may want to ask a neighbor to check the power supply and freezer operation every 48 hours.
)RUH[WHQGHGYDFDWLRQVRUDEVHQFHVRXPDSUHIHUWR move your frozen foods to a storage locker temporarily. If your freezer is to be left empty, disconnect power cord plug from wall outlet. To prevent formation of odors, place open box of baking soda in freezer and leave freezer door/lid open.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

7

INSTALLATION

Preparing to Install the Freezer

Read these instructions completely and carefully.

Freezer Location

Your freezer should be conveniently located for day-to-day use in a dry, well-ventilated room.

‘RQRWLQVWDOOWKHIUHH]HULQDORFDWLRQH[SRVHGWRUDLQ water or direct sunlight.

‘RQRWLQVWDOOWKHIUHH]HUZKHUHWKHWHPSHUDWXUHZLOOJR EHORZ)&RUDERYH)&EHFDXVHLWZLOO not maintain proper temperatures.
Be sure to install your freezer on a floor strong enough to support it when it is fully loaded.

The freezer must be solidly positioned on the floor if it is to function at its best. Your freezer has adjustable leveling legs that can be turned to be solidly positioned wherever the floor is too uneven. If the place selected for the freezer is damp or moist, place 2 x 4’s (51 mm x 102 mm) under its entire length to assure adequate support.

Clearances
On all models, allow 3″ (76 mm) on top, back and sides for proper air circulation. Allow sufficient space on top for lid to open.

Lid Removal

CAUTION LIFTING HAZARD
7KHOLGLVKHDY8VHERWKKDQGVWRVHFXUHWKHOLGEHIRUH lifting.
CAUTION HINGE SPRING UNDER TENSION
If it is necessary to remove the lid, follow these steps:

2. Open the lid to the maximum position. (The hinges are loosest at this position.)
3. Loosen, do not remove, the 4 screws from the lower part of the hinge that are mounted to the cabinet.

1. Remove each upper hinge cover by grasping on the sides and pulling upwards. Remove each lower hinge cover by grasping on the sides and pulling down.

8SSHU+LQJH Cover
Lower Hinge Cover

Hinge screws to be loosened

Hinge screws to be loosened

4. Raise/lift the lid until the screws align with the larger slotted openings in the bottom of the hinge. Each hinge is still attached to the lid with 4 screws.
5. To reinstall lid follow steps in reverse. Tighten all hinge screws but avoid over-tightening to prevent stripping. Reinstall hinge covers.

8

49-1000422 Rev. 1

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Troubleshooting Tips… Before you call for service

Save time and money! Review the charts on the following pages first and you may not need to call for service.

Problem Freezer does not operate or Power-On Light is not on
Freezer starts/stops too frequently
Freezer operates too long
Noisy operation or cabinet vibrates
Freezer temperature too warm Foods defrosting
Freezer temperature too cold Moisture forms on outside of cabinet Interior light does not work (on some models)

Possible Causes
Temperature control set to OFF position.
Freezer is unplugged.
The fuse is blown/circuit breaker is tripped.
Door/lid left open.
Too frequent or too long lid openings.
Temperature control set too cold.
Door/lid left open.
Too frequent or too long lid openings.
Temperature control set too cold.
Inadequate air circulation space around cabinet.
Floor may be weak, causing freezer to vibrate when compressor is on.
Cabinet is not positioned solidly on floor.
Door/lid left open.
Too frequent or too long lid openings.
Temperature control set to OFF position.
Freezer is unplugged.
The fuse is blown/circuit breaker is tripped.
Door/lid left open.
Too frequent or too long lid openings.
Temperature control set too cold.
Not unusual during periods of high humidity.
No power at outlet.
Freezer is unplugged.
Light bulb burned out.

What To Do Move the control to a temperature setting.
Push the plug completely into the outlet. Replace fuse or reset the breaker.
Check to see if package is holding door/lid open. Open the lid less often.
6HH8VLQJWKH)UHH]HU Check to see if package is holding door/lid open. Open the lid less often.
6HH8VLQJWKH)UHH]HU See Preparing to install the freezer
Placing 2 X 4’s (51 mm X 102 mm) under the length of the freezer will help support it and may reduce vibration.
See Preparing to install the freezer. Or use shims for uneven floor. uneven floor. Check to see if package is holding door/lid open. Open the lid less often.
Move the control to a temperature setting.
Push the plug completely into the outlet. Replace fuse or reset the breaker.
Check to see if package is holding door/lid open. Open the lid less often.
6HH8VLQJWKH)UHH]HU
Wipe surface dry.
Replace fuse or reset the breaker. Push the plug completely into the outlet. Replace bulb.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

9

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Troubleshooting Tips… Before you call for service

Problem
Door/lid won’t fully close by itself
Slow starting time after being off
([FHVVLYHIURVWEXLOGXS

Possible Causes Package holding door/lid open.
Built-in overload protection.
Door/lid left open.

Too frequent or too long lid openings.
Not unusual during periods of high humidity.

What To Do Move package to a different location.
This is normal after being off.
Check to see if package is holding door/lid open. Open the lid less often.
Wipe surface dry.

NOTE: ‘RQRWUHWXUQWKHIUHH]HUWRWKHVWRUHZKHUHRXSXUFKDVHGLW7KHIUHH]HULVHOLJLEOHIRULQKRPHVHUYLFH )RUZDUUDQWVHUYLFHFRQWDFWXVDWGEAppliances.comRUFDOO*(&$5(686RU&DQDGD

Normal Operating Characteristics
These things are normal and do not indicate a need for service.
$ZDUPFDELQHWH[WHULRUDVWKHUHIULJHUDWLRQVVWHP transfers heat from the inside to the outside through the exterior cabinet walls.
7KHVRXQGRIWKHKLJKHIILFLHQFFRPSUHVVRUPRWRU

10

49-1000422 Rev. 1

LIMITED WARRANTY

Freezer Limited Warranty

GEAppliances.com
For US Customers, DOOZDUUDQWVHUYLFHSURYLGHGERXU)DFWRU6HUYLFH&HQWHUVRUDQDXWKRUL]HG&XVWRPHU&DUH® technician. To schedule service, on-line, 24 hours a day, visit us at GEAppliances.com, or call 800.GE.CARES
(800.432.2737). Please have serial number and model number available when calling for service. In Canada, call 800.561.3344.

For the Period of:
One Year )URPWKHGDWHRIWKH original purchase

GE Appliances Will Replace
Any part of the freezer which fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship. ‘XULQJWKLVSHULRGRI2QH<HDUIURPWKHGDWHRIRULJLQDOSXUFKDVH*($SSOLDQFHVZLOO FKRRVHDWLWVRSWLRQWRUHSODFHRUVHUYLFHWKHGHIHFWLYHXQLW’XULQJWKLVOLPLWHGRQHHDU warranty, should GE Appliances choose to service the unit, GE Appliances will provide any part of the freezer which fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship and free of FKDUJHDOOODERUDQGUHODWHGVHUYLFHFRVWVWRUHSODFHWKHGHIHFWLYHSDUW’XULQJWKLVOLPLWHG one-year warranty, should GE Appliances choose to replace the unit, it may do so by providing you with a certificate redeemable at a retailer for a replacement product.

What GE Appliances Will Not Cover:
Service trips to your home to teach you how to use the product.
Improper installation, delivery or maintenance. Failure of the product if it is abused, misused, or
used for other than the intended purpose or used commercially. Loss of food due to spoilage. Damage caused after delivery. Replacement of house fuses or resetting of circuit breakers.

Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, floods or acts of God.
Incidental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance.
Product not accessible to provide required service. $VVRFLDWHGFRVWVZKHQ*($SSOLDQFHVFKRRVHVWR
issue the consumer a certificate as a form of product replacement.

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Your sole and exclusive remedy is product repair as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by law.
For US Customers: This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for SURGXFWVSXUFKDVHGIRUKRPHXVHZLWKLQWKH86$,IWKHSURGXFWLVORFDWHGLQDQDUHDZKHUHVHUYLFHED*( Appliances Authorized Servicer is not available, you may be responsible for a trip charge or you may be required to bring the product to an Authorized GE Appliances Service location for service. In Alaska, the limited warranty excludes the cost of shipping or service calls to your home. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state’s Attorney General.
Warrantor US: GE Appliances, a Haier company Louisville, KY 40225
For Customers in Canada: This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for products purchased in Canada for home use within Canada. In-home warrant service will be provided in areas where it is available and deemed reasonable by Mabe to provide.
Warrantor Canada: MC Commercial, Burlington, Ontario, L7R 5B6

Staple your receipt here. Proof of the original purchase date is needed to obtain service under the warranty.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

11

CONSUMER SUPPORT

Consumer Support
GE Appliances Website
Have a question or need assistance with your appliance? Try the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any day of the year! You can also shop for more great GE Appliances products and take advantage of all our on-line support VHUYLFHVGHVLJQHGIRURXUFRQYHQLHQFH,QWKH86GEAppliances.com In Canada: GEAppliances.ca
Register Your Appliance
Register your new appliance on-line at your convenience! Timely product registration will allow for enhanced communication and prompt service under the terms of your warranty, should the need arise. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration card included in the packing material. ,QWKH86GEAppliances.com/register In Canada: 3URGVXSSRUWPDEHFDFUP3URGXFWV3URGXFW5HJLVWUDWLRQDVS[
Schedule Service
Expert GE Appliances repair service is only one step away from your door. Get on-line and schedule your service at RXUFRQYHQLHQFHDQGDRIWKHHDU,QWKH86GEAppliances.com/service or call 800.432.2737 during normal business hours. In Canada: GEAppliances.ca/en/support/service-request or call 800.561.3344
([WHQGHG:DUUDQWLHV
Purchase a GE Appliances extended warranty and learn about special discounts that are available while your warranty is still in effect. You can purchase it on-line anytime. GE Appliances Services will still be there after your warranty expires. ,QWKH86*($SSOLDQFHVFRPH[WHQGHGZDUUDQWor call 800.626.2224 during normal business hours. In Canada: *($SSOLDQFHVFDHQVXSSRUWSXUFKDVHH[WHQGHGZDUUDQW or call 800.290.9029
Parts and Accessories
Individuals qualified to service their own appliances can have parts or accessories sent directly to their homes 9,6$0DVWHU&DUGDQG’LVFRYHUFDUGVDUHDFFHSWHG2UGHURQOLQHWRGDKRXUVHYHUGD ,QWKH86GEApplianceparts.com or by phone at 877.959.8688 during normal business hours. Instructions contained in this manual cover procedures to be performed by any user. Other servicing JHQHUDOOVKRXOGEHUHIHUUHGWRTXDOLILHGVHUYLFHSHUVRQQHO&DXWLRQPXVWEHH[HUFLVHGVLQFHLPSURSHU servicing may cause unsafe operation. Customers in Canada should consult the yellow pages for the nearest Mabe service center, visit our website at GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories or call 800.661.1616.
Contact Us
If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from GE Appliances, contact us on our Website with all the details including your phone number, or write to: ,QWKH86*HQHUDO0DQDJHU&XVWRPHU5HODWLRQV_*($SSOLDQFHV$SSOLDQFH3DUN_/RXLVYLOOH.< GEAppliances.com/contact ,Q&DQDGD’LUHFWRU&RQVXPHU5HODWLRQV0DEH&DQDGD,QF_6XLWH)DFWRU/DQH_0RQFWRQ1%(&0 GEAppliances.ca/en/contact-us

12

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CONGÉLATEURS HORIZONTAUX

MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ . . . . . . . . .3
UTILISATION DU CONGÉLATEUR . . . . . . . . . . .5
Directives de dégivrage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
ENTRETIEN ET NETTOYAGE . . . .7
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
CONSEILS DE DÉPANNAGE. . . . .9
Caractéristiques normales de fonctionnement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
GARANTIE LIMITÉE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SOUTIEN AU CONSOMMATEUR. . . . . . . . . . . 12

MANUEL D’UTILISATION ET D’INSTALLATION
Dégivrage non automatique : FCM5, FCM7
FRANÇAIS

Inscrivez les numéros de modèle et de série ici : Numéro de modèle : ______ Numéro de série :_________ Ils sont inscrits sur une plaque qui se trouve sur le dessus central de l’arrière du congélateur.
49-1000422 Rev. 1 05-22 GEA

NOUS VOUS REMERCIONS D’ACCUEILLIR GE APPLIANCES CHEZ VOUS
Que vous ayez grandi avec GE Appliances ou qu’il s’agisse de votre première acquisition, nous sommes heureux de vous accueillir dans notre famille.
Nous sommes fiers du savoir-faire, de l’innovation et de l’esthétique qui composent chaque appareil GE Appliances, et nous pensons que vous le serez aussi. Dans cette optique, nous vous rappelons
que l’enregistrement de votre électroménager vous assure la communication de renseignements importants sur le produit et la garantie lorsque vous en avez besoin.
Enregistrez votre électroménager GE en ligne dès maintenant. Des sites Web et des numéros de téléphone utiles figurent dans la section Soutien au consommateur de ce manuel d’utilisation. Vous pouvez aussi poster la fiche de garantie pré-imprimée incluse dans l’emballage.

2

49-1000422 Rev. 1

INFORMATION DE SÉCURITÉ

INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES DE SÉCURITÉ
LIRE TOUTES LES INSTRUCTIONS AVANT D’UTILISER L’APPAREIL

AVERTISSEMENT Pour réduire le risque d’incendie, d’explosion, de choc électrique ou de blessures lorsque vous
utilisez votre congélateur, veuillez suivre ces consignes de sécurité :

& HFRQJpODWHXUGRLWrWUHFRUUHFWHPHQWLQVWDOOp FRQIRUPpPHQWDX[&RQVLJQHVG¶,QVWDOODWLRQDYDQWWRXWH utilisation.

3 RXUpYLWHUWRXWULVTXHGHVXIIRFDWLRQRXG¶HQIHUPHPHQW retirez le couvercle d’un congélateur avant de le mettre au
rebut ou si vous arrêtez de l’utiliser.

‘ pEUDQFKH]OHFRQJpODWHXUDYDQWG¶HIIHFWXHUXQH réparation, de remplacer une ampoule ou de le nettoyer. Remarque : L’alimentation du congélateur ne peut être déconnectée par aucune des fonctions sur le panneau de commande. Remarque : Les réparations doivent être effectuées par un professionnel qualifié.
5 HPHWWH]WRXWHVOHVSLqFHVHWSDQQHDX[HQSODFHDYDQW d’utiliser l’appareil.
* DUGH]OHVPDWpULDX[HWYDSHXUVLQIODPPDEOHVORLQGX réfrigérateur.
1 ¶HQWUHSRVH]SDVGDQVFHWpOHFWURPpQDJHUGHV substances explosives telles que des bombes aérosols qui contiennent un gaz propulseur.
1 ¶XWLOLVH]SDVGHFRUGRQGHUDOORQJH

Afin de prévenir les accidents graves ou la mort, les enfants ne doivent pas se tenir ni jouer dans ou sur l’électroménager.
/ HVHQIDQWVHWOHVSHUVRQQHVGRQWOHVFDSDFLWpVVRQW réduites sur le plan physique, sensoriel ou mental, ou qui manquent d’expérience ou de connaissances, peuvent utiliser cet électroménager seulement si elles sont surveillées ou ont reçues des consignes de sécurité sur son usage et les risques y sont associés.
& HWpOHFWURPpQDJHUHVWFRQoXSRXUXQHXWLOLVDWLRQ domestique et applications similaires : salle du personnel dans une usine, un bureau ou d’autres lieux de travail; maison de ferme; clients dans un hôtel, un motel, un gîte touristique et d’autres lieux résidentiels; approvisionnement et applications similaires non reliées au commerce de

détail.

ATTENTION Pour réduire le risque de blessures lorsque vous utilisez votre congélateur, veuillez suivre les consignes de
sécurité suivantes :

1 HQHWWRH]SDVOHFRQJpODWHXUDYHFGHO¶HDXWLqGHTXDQG celui-ci est froid. Les composants peuvent se casser s’ils sont exposés à des changements soudains de température ou si vous les cognez ou les faites tomber.
e ORLJQH]OHVGRLJWVGHVSDUWLHVGXFRQJpODWHXURO¶RQSHXW facilement se pincer : les espaces entre le couvercle et la cuve sont toujours étroits. Soyez prudent lorsque vous fermez le couvercle en présence d’enfants.

1 HWRXFKH]SDVOHVVXUIDFHVIURLGHVGXFRQJpODWHXU lorsque vous avez les mains humides ou mouillées. La peau risque d’adhérer à ces surfaces extrêmement froides.
1 HUHFRQJHOH]SDVOHVDOLPHQWVVXUJHOpVTXLRQW complètement dégelé.

AVERTISSEMENT

RISQUE D’EXPLOSION Fluide frigorigène inflammable

Cet électroménager contient le réfrigérant isobutane, aussi connu comme R600a, un gaz naturel à compatibilité élevée avec l’environnement. Il s’agit cependant d’un combustible. Observez les consignes de sécurité ci-dessous afin de réduire le risque de blessure ou de dommage à la propriété.

3. Mettez le appareil au rebut conformément aux réglementations fédérales et locales. Le fluide frigorigène inflammable et le matériel isolant utilisés nécessitent des SURFpGXUHVGHPLVHDXUHEXWVSpFLDOHV&RPPXQLTXH] avec les autorités locales compétentes pour la mise au rebut de votre appareil sans danger pour l’environnement.

1. Lors de la manipulation, de l’installation et de l’utilisation de cet appareil, prenez soin de ne pas endommager les tubes de circulation du fluide frigorigène.
2. L’entretien ou la réparation doivent être effectués par un personnel de service autorisé. Utilisez seulement des pièces de rechange autorisées par le fabricant.

4. N’obstruez pas les évents dans l’enceinte prévue pour l’appareil.
5. N’utilisez pas d’appareils ou autres moyens mécaniques pour accélérer le processus de dégivrage.
6. N’endommagez pas le circuit du fluide frigorigène. 7. N’utilisez aucun appareil électrique pour dégivrer votre
congélateur.

LIRE ET CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS

49-1000422 Rev. 1

3

INFORMATION DE SÉCURITÉ

INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES DE SÉCURITÉ
LIRE TOUTES LES INSTRUCTIONS AVANT D’UTILISER L’APPAREIL

AVERTISSEMENT

RISQUE D’INCENDIE OU D’EXPLOSION

&RQVHUYH]OHVPDWpULDX[HWYDSHXUVLQIODPPDEOHVjO¶pFDUWGHYRWUHDSSDUHLO8QHH[SORVLRQXQLQFHQGLHYRLUHODPRUWSRXUUDLW en résulter.

BRANCHEMENTS ÉLECTRIQUES

AVERTISSEMENT

RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.

Branchez l’appareil dans une prise triple avec terre.

Ne retirez pas la broche de terre.

N’utilisez pas d’adaptateur.

N’utilisez pas de cordon de rallonge.

Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entraîner des risques d’incendies, des chocs électriques ou la mort.

Ne coupez ni retirez en aucun cas la troisième broche (mise à la terre) de la fiche du cordon d’alimentation. Pour votre sécurité, cet appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre.

Le cordon d’alimentation de cet appareil est muni d’une fiche à 3 broches (mise à la terre) qui se branche dans une prise murale ordinaire à 3 alvéoles (mise à la terre) pour réduire au minimum les risques de chocs électriques.
Faites examiner la prise de courant et le circuit par un électricien qualifié pour vous assurer que la prise est correctement mise à la terre.
Dans le cas d’une prise biphasée, l’installateur a la responsabilité et l’obligation de la remplacer par une prise triphasée correctement mise à la terre. N’utilisez pas d’adaptateur.
Le congélateur doit toujours être branché dans sa propre prise de courant, dont la tension nominale est identique à celle indiquée sur la plaque signalétique.

8QHDOLPHQWDWLRQpOHFWULTXHjYROWV&$+]DYHF XQIXVLEOHGHRXDPSqUHVHWXQHPLVHjODWHUUHHVW QpFHVVDLUH&HFLSHUPHWG¶REWHQLUXQPHLOOHXUUHQGHPHQWHW évite de surcharger les circuits électriques du domicile qui risque d’occasionner un incendie en surchauffant.
Ne débranchez jamais le congélateur en tirant sur le cordon d’alimentation. Saisissez fermement la fiche du cordon et tirez droit pour la retirer de la prise.
&HVVH]LPPpGLDWHPHQWG¶XWLOLVHUXQFRUGRQpOHFWULTXH endommagé. Si le cordon électrique est endommagé, son remplacement doit être effectué par un technicien en réparation qualifié au moyen d’un cordon de rechange autorisé par le fabricant.
Lorsque vous déplacez votre congélateur du mur, faites attention de ne pas le faire rouler sur le cordon d’alimentation afin de ne pas l’endommager.

MISE AU REBUT APPROPRIÉE DE VOTRE ANCIEN CONGÉLATEUR

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE SUFFOQUER OU D’Y ÊTRE EMPRISONNÉ

Le non-respect de ces instructions d’élimination peut entraîner la mort ou des blessures graves.

IMPORTANT: Les enfants pris au piège ou morts d’asphyxie sont toujours d’actualité. Les réfrigérateurs et congélateurs abandonnés sont toujours aussi dangereux, même si on n’attend que «quelques jours» pour s’en débarrasser. Si vous ne gardez pas votre ancien réfrigérateur ou congélateur, veuillez suivre les directives ci-dessous afin de prévenir les

Avant de vous débarrasser de votre ancien réfrigérateur ou congélateur :
Démontez le couvercle du congélateur.
Laissez les clayettes en place afin d’empêcher les enfants de grimper à l’intérieur.

accidents.

Mise au rebut des produits réfrigérants et en mousse
Mettez l’électroménager au rebut conformément à la réglementation fédérale et locale. Le fluide frigorigène inflammable et le PDWpULHOLVRODQWXWLOLVpVQpFHVVLWHQWGHVSURFpGXUHVGHPLVHDXUHEXWVSpFLDOHV&RPPXQLTXH]DYHFOHVDXWRULWpVORFDOHVSRXU connaître la façon de mettre votre électroménager au rebut qui soit respectueuse de l’environnement.

LIRE ET CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS

4

49-1000422 Rev. 1

UTILISATION DU CONGÉLATEUR

Utilisation du congélateur

Mise en marche du congélateur
1. Nettoyez l’intérieur du congélateur avec une solution de bicarbonate de soude et d’eau (voir la section Entretien et nettoyage).
2. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation dans une prise de courant.

3. Assurez-vous que la commande de température est réglée sur 4.
4. Laissez fonctionner le congélateur pendant au moins quatre heures avant d’y ranger des aliments.

Commande de température
Le réglage de la température de congélation s’effectue en plaçant la commande à une position variant entre <<Min>> et <<Max>> (température la plus basse).
Si vous désirez une température plus basse ou plus élevée, réglez la commande d’une position à la fois.
,OIDXGUDDWWHQGUHTXHOTXHVKHXUHVDSUqVFKDTXHUqJOHPHQW de la commande pour que la température du congélateur se stabilise.
Le fait de régler la commande à OFF (éteint) arrête la congélation mais ne coupe pas l’alimentation électrique du congélateur.

Voyant marche-arrêt (sur certains modèles)
Le voyant marche-arrêt vous indique que le congélateur est correctement raccordé à l’alimentation électrique.
Le voyant reste allumé même lorsque la commande de température est réglée à OFF (éteint).

Key-Ejecting Lock (on some models)
The lock is spring loaded so the key cannot be left in the ORFN7RORFNRUXQORFNSUHVVWKHNHLQZKLOHWXUQLQJ,IWKH key is lost, contact your dealer for a replacement or go to GEApplianceParts.com. Always give the model and serial number of the freezer when requesting a replacement key.
AVERTISSEMENT
To prevent a child from being entrapped, keep the key out of reach of children and away from the freezer.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

5

UTILISATION DU CONGÉLATEUR: Directives de dégivrage

Directives de dégivrage

Dans la plupart des climats, il faut dégivrer l’appareil seulement deux fois par année.
Pour un fonctionnement efficace de votre congélateur, ne laissez pas s’accumuler plus de 1/2 po (13 mm).

AVERTISSEMENT Risque d’incendie et G¶H[SORVLRQ&RQWLHQWXQÀXLGHIULJRULJqQHLQÀDPPDEOH eOLPLQH]OHJLYUHHQJUDWWDQWDYHFXQHVSDWXOHHQSODVWLTXHRX en bois ou un racloir. N’utilisez pas de pic à glace ou d’outil métallique ou à bord tranchant pour éviter de perforer la cuve interne du congélateur et la tuyauterie du fluide frigorigène inflammable derrière celle-ci.
N’utilisez aucun appareil électrique pour effectuer le dégivrage de votre congélateur.

Dégivrage complet

1. 5pJOH]ODFRPPDQGHGHWHPSpUDWXUHVXU2))pWHLQWHW débranchez le congélateur.

4. eSRQJH]OHVXUSOXVG¶HDXGDQVOHIRQGGXFRQJpODWHXUDX fur et à mesure pour éviter tout débordement.

2. 5HWLUH]WRXVOHVDOLPHQWVGHO¶DSSDUHLOHWSODFH]OHVGDQV des boîtes en carton ondulé, des sacs isolants, des glacières, etc. Enveloppez-les dans des couvertures ou des journaux pour les isoler, au besoin.
3. Laissez la porte ou le couvercle ouvert et placez à l’intérieur de l’appareil des casseroles d’eau chaude pour accélérer le décollement du givre. Enlevez les gros morceaux de givre avant qu’ils fondent.
Modèles coffre possèdent un écoulement pour l’eau de dégivrage à l’avant. 5HWLUH]OHERXFKRQGXWXDX d’écoulement à partir de l’extérieur et le bouchon de vidange à l’intérieur de la caisse.
REMARQUE : De l’eau peut dégoutter du rebord du FRXYHUFOHSHQGDQWOHGpJLYUDJH&HSKpQRPqQHHVW normal. De la glace s’accumule dans l’isolationdu couvercle lorsqu’on ouvre celui-ci pour rajouter ou retirer des aliments, et fond pendant le dégivrage.

5. Après le dégivrage, nettoyez l’intérieur du congélateur (voir la section Entretien et nettoyage).
5pLQVWDOOH]OHERXFKRQG¶pFRXOHPHQWjO¶LQWpULHXUGX congélateur et remettez le capuchon sur l’écoulement de GpJLYUDJH5HSOLH]HWVpFKH]OHMRLQWTXLVHWURXYHGXF{Wp des charnières du couvercle.
7. 5HEUDQFKH]OHFRQJpODWHXU5pJOH]ODFRPPDQGHGH température à sa position initiale et remettez les aliments au congélateur.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CONSEILS DE DÉPANNAGE

Conseils de dépannage

Nettoyage de votre congélateur
Extérieur. Protégez le fini de l’appareil. La carrosserie du congélateur est recouverte d’une peinture de haute qualité, cuite au four. Si vous l’entretenez de la façon appropriée, le fini ne rouillera pas et conservera son aspect neuf pendant des années. Appliquez une couche de cire pour électroménagers lorsque vous recevez votre appareil et, par la suite, au moins deux fois par année. La cire pour électroménagers se révèle également efficace pour enlever les résidus de ruban gommé sur les surfaces du congélateur.
Gardez le fini propre. Essuyez-le avec un linge propre légèrement humecté de cire pour électroménagers ou de détergent liquide doux pour la vaisselle. Essuyez et polissez avec un linge doux et propre. N’essuyez pas le congélateur avec un linge à vaisselle sale ou une serviette humide. N’utilisez pas de tampons à récurer, de produits nettoyants en poudre, de javellisants ou de produits nettoyants contenant du javellisant.
REMARQUE : Faites attention lorsque vous éloignez le congélateur du mur, car vous risquez d’endommager le revêtement de sol, plus particulièrement ceux qui sont coussinés ou dont la surface est gaufrée.

Intérieur. Nettoyez l’intérieur de votre congélateur au moins une fois par année. Nous vous recommandons de débrancher l’appareil avant le nettoyage. Si cela est trop difficile, tordez bien votre linge ou votre éponge pour enlever l’excès d’eau lorsque vous nettoyez autour des interrupteurs, des lampes et des commandes.
Nettoyez à l’aide d’une solution d’eau chaude et de bicarbonate de soude­ environ 1 cuillère à soupe (15 ml) GHELFDUERQDWHSDUSLQWHOLWUHG¶HDX5LQFH]jIRQGDYHF de l’eau et essuyez. N’utilisez pas de poudres à récurer ni de produits nettoyants abrasifs. NE lavez PAS les parties amovibles dans le lave-vaisselle.
Laissez une boîte ouverte de bicarbonate de soude dans le FRQJpODWHXUSRXUDEVRUEHUOHVRGHXUV5HPSODFH]ODERvWH tous les trois mois.

Lors d’une panne de courant prolongée

*DUGH]OHFRXYHUFOHGXFRQJpODWHXUIHUPp9RWUHFRQJpODWHXU peut garder les aliments congelés pendant 24 heures lorsque le couvercle n’est pas ouvert.
6LOHFRQJpODWHXUQHIRQFWLRQQHSDVSHQGDQWSOXVGH heures, ajoutez de la glace sèche. Placez de gros morceaux de glace dans l’appareil. Ajoutez-en davantage au besoin.

ATTENTION
La manipulation de glace sèche peut causer des gelures aux mains­il est recommandé de porter des gants ou autre équipement de protection.
6LYRXVQHGLVSRVH]SDVGHJODFHVqFKHHQOHYH]OHV aliments et placez-les temporairement dans une armoire pour produits congelés jusqu’à ce que le courant soit rétabli.

Déménagement
Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation de la prise murale. 5HWLUH]WRXVOHVDOLPHQWVIDLWHVGpJLYUHUSXLVQHWWRH]OH congélateur.
Fixez toutes les pièces mobiles, commela grille et les clayettes, en les immobilisant à l’aide de ruban gommé afin d’éviter de les endommager.

Assurez-vous que le congélateur demeure debout pendant le déménagement et dans le camion. L’appareil doit être immobilisé dans le camion. Protégez l’appareil à l’aide d’une couverture.

Lorsque vous partez en vacances
Pour assurer le bon fonctionnement de votre congélateur pendant vos vacances, assurez-vous que l’alimentation secteur de votre résidence n’est pas coupée. Pour assurer la protection des denrées dans votre congélateur, vous pouvez demander à un voisin de vérifier toutes les 48 heures l’alimentation électrique et le fonctionnement de votre congélateur.
Lorsque vous vous absentez pendant une période prolongée, il peut être préférable de ranger temporairement vos aliments congelés dans une armoire de rangement pour produits congelés. Si vous laissez votre congélateur vide, débranchez le cordon d’alimentation de la prise de courant. Pour prévenir la formation d’odeurs, placez une boîte ouverte de bicarbonate de soude dans le congélateur et laissez la porte ou le couvercle de l’appareil ouvert.

Lorsque le congélateur ne fonctionne pas, il peut être laissé dans une pièce non chauffée sans que l’appareil ou son mécanisme ne subissent de dommages.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

7

INSTALLATION

Préparatifs pour l’installation

Veuillez lire toutes les directives attentivement.
Emplacement du congélateur

Votre congélateur doit être installé à un endroit pratique, en YXHG¶XQHXWLOLVDWLRQTXRWLGLHQQHGDQVXQHSLqFHELHQDpUpHR l’air est sec.
1¶LQVWDOOH]SDVYRWUHFRQJpODWHXUGDQVO¶HQGURLWROD WHPSpUDWXUHHVWDXGHVVRXVGH)RXDQGHVVXVGH) parce qu’il ne maintiendra pas les températures appropriées.
Assurez-vous que le plancher sur lequel sera installé votre congélateur est suffisamment solide pour le supporter lorsqu’il est plein.

N’installez pas le congélateur dans un endroit exposé à l’eau de pluie ou aux rayons directs du soleil.
Pour qu’il puisse offrir un rendement optimum, le congélateur doit reposer solidement sur le sol. Vous pouvez installer des cales lorsque le sol est inégal. Si l’endroit choisi pour l’installation du congélateur est humide ou mouillé, installez GHVPRUFHDX[GHERLVGHSR[SRPP;PP sous l’appareil, sur toute la longueur, pour assurer un support adéquat.

Dégagements
6XUWRXVOHVPRGqOHVSUpYRH]XQGpJDJHPHQWGHSR mm) de chaque côté, à l’arrière et au-dessus de l’appareil afin d’assurer une circulation d’air adéquate. Laissez suffisamment d’espace au-dessus du couvercle pour permettre son ouverture.

Démontage du couvercle

ATTENTION RISQUE ASSOCIÉ À UN POIDS LOURD
Le couvercle est lourd. Utilisez les deux mains pour bien agripper le couvercle avant de le soulever.

2. Ouvrez le couvercle au maximum. (Les charnières sont moins serrées dans cette position.)
3. Desserrez, sans les retirer, les 4 vis de la partie inférieur de la charnière qui sont vissées dans la carrosserie.

ATTENTION RESSORT DE CHARNIÈRE SOUS
TENSION S’il est nécessaire de retirer le couvercle, suivez les étapes suivantes :
1. Enlevez chaque couvercle de charnière supérieure en agrippant par les côtés et tirant vers le haut. Enlevez chaque couvercle de charnière inférieure en agrippant par les côtés et tirant vers le bas.
&RXYHUFOH de charnière supérieure

Vis de charnière à desserrer

Vis de charnière à desserrer

&RXYHUFOH de charnière
inférieure

4. Levez le couvercle jusqu’à ce que les vis s’alignent sur les orifices allongés les plus grands dans le bas de la charnière. &KDTXHFKDUQLqUHHVWWRXMRXUVDWWDFKpHDXFRXYHUFOHSDU vis.
5. Pour reposer le couvercle, suivez les étapes dans l’ordre inverse. Serrez toutes les vis de charnière mais évitez de WURSVHUUHUSRXUQHSDVIDXVVHUOHILOHWDJH5HSRVH]OHV couvercles de charnière.

8

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CONSEILS DE DÉPANNAGE

Conseils de dépannage… Avant de faire un appel de service

eFRQRPLVH]WHPSVHWDUJHQW&RQVXOWH]G¶DERUGOHVWDEOHDX[GHVSDJHVVXLYDQWHVHWYRXVSRXUULH]YRXVpYLWHUXQDSSHOGHVHUYLFH

Problème

Causes possibles

Correctifs

Le congélateur ne fonctionne pas ou le voyant march-arrêt n’est pas allumé

Commande de température réglée à OFF (éteint). Le congélateur n’est pas branché. Le fusible est grillé/le disjoncteur est déclenché.

5pJOH]ODFRPPDQGHjXQUpJODJHGHWHPSpUDWXUH
Enfoncez bien la fiche dans la prise murale. 5HPSODFH]OHIXVLEOHRXUpHQFOHQFKH]OHGLVMRQFWHXU

Le congélateur se met en marche et s’arrête trop fréquemment

Porte ou couvercle laissé ouvert. Ouverture trop fréquente ou trop prolongée du couvercle.

Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas un paquet qui empêche le couvercle de se fermer.
Ouvrez moins fréquemment le couvercle.

Commande réglée à une température trop basse.

&RQVXOWH]8WLOLVDWLRQGXFRQJpODWHXU

Le congélateur fonctionne trop longtemps

Porte ou couvercle laissé ouvert. Ouverture trop fréquente ou trop prolongée du couvercle.

Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas un paquet qui empêche le couvercle de se fermer.
Ouvrez moins fréquemment le couvercle.

Commande réglée à une température trop &RQVXOWH]8WLOLVDWLRQGXFRQJpODWHXU basse.

Circulation d’air inadéquate autour de l’appareil.

&RQVXOWH]3UpSDUDWLIVSRXUO¶LQVWDOODWLRQ

Fonctionnement bruyant ou vibration de l’appareil

Le plancher peut manquer de solidité, ce qui fait vibrer le congélateur lorsque le compresseur fonctionne. L’appareil ne repose pas solidement sur le sol.

Assurez-vous que le congélateur est situé sur un plancher solide et utilisez des cales, au besoin, pour mettre l’appareil de niveau.
Voyez la section Préparatifs pour l’installation. Utilisez des cales, au besoin, pour mettre l’appareil de niveau.

Température trop élevée dans le congélateur

Porte ou couvercle laissé ouvert. Ouverture trop fréquente ou trop prolongée du couvercle.

Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas un paquet qui empêche le couvercle de se fermer.
Ouvrez moins fréquemment le couvercle.

Les aliments dégèlent

Commande de température réglée à OFF (éteint).

5pJOH]ODFRPPDQGHjXQUpJODJHGHWHPSpUDWXUH

Le congélateur n’est pas branché.

Enfoncez bien la fiche dans la prise murale.

Le fusible est grillé/le disjoncteur est déclenché.

5HPSODFH]OHIXVLEOHRXUpHQFOHQFKH]OHGLVMRQFWHXU

Porte ou couvercle laissé ouvert.

Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas un paquet qui empêche le couvercle de se fermer.

Ouverture trop fréquente ou trop prolongée du couvercle.

Ouvrez moins fréquemment le couvercle.

Température trop basse dans le congélateur

Commande réglée à une température trop basse.

&RQVXOWH]Fonctionnement de votre congélateur.

De la condensation se forme sur l’extérieur de l’appareil

Phénomène normal par temps très humide.

Essuyez bien l’extérieur.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

9

CONSEILS DE DÉPANNAGE

Conseils de dépannage… Avant de faire un appel de service

Problème La lampe intérieure ne s’allume pas (sur certains modèles).
Le couvercle ne se ferme pas complètement de lui-même Remise en marche lente après une période de nonfonctionnement Accumulation excessive de givre

Causes possibles Pas de courant à la prise.
Le congélateur n’est pas branché.
L’ampoule est grillée. Un paquet empêche le couvercle de se fermer.

Correctifs
5HPSODFH]OHIXVLEOHRXUpHQFOHQFKH]OH disjoncteur.
Branchez la fiche comme il faut dans la prise de courant.
5HPSODFH]O¶DPSRXOH Déplacez le paquet.

Dispositif intégré de protection contre &HFLHVWQRUPDODSUqVTXHOHFRQJpODWHXUDLWpWp

les surcharges.

arrêté.

Porte ou couvercle laissé ouvert.
Ouverture trop fréquente ou trop prolongée du couvercle. Phénomène normal par temps très humide.

Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas un paquet qui empêche le couvercle de se fermer. Ouvrez moins fréquemment le couvercle.
Essuyez les surfaces.

NOTE :1HUHQYRH]SDVO¶DSSDUHLODXPDJDVLQRYRXVO¶DYH]DFKHWp/HFRQJpODWHXUHVWDGPLVVLEOHSRXUOHVHUYLFHjODPDLVRQ Pour le service de garantie, contactez-nous sur electromenagersge.ca,RXDSSHOH]OH

Caractéristiques normales de fonctionnement
&HVSKpQRPqQHVVRQWQRUPDX[HWQ¶LQGLTXHQWSDVXQEHVRLQ de réparation.
/¶H[WpULHXUGXFRQJpODWHXUGHYLHQWFKDXGORUVTXHOHVVWqPH de réfrigération transfère la chaleur de l’intérieur vers l’extérieur à travers les parois extérieures du congélateur.
/HVRQGXPRWHXUGXFRPSUHVVHXUjUHQGHPHQWKDXWHPHQW efficace.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

GARANTIE LIMITÉE

Garantie limitée du congélateur

Electromenagersge.ca
Pour les clients des États-Unis,WRXWHVOHVUpSDUDWLRQVHQYHUWXGHODJDUDQWLHVRQWIRXUQLVSDUQRV&HQWUHGH6HUYLFHG¶8VLQHRX SDUXQWHFKQLFLHQDXWRULVp&XVWRPHU&DUH3RXUSUpYRLUXQHUpSDUDWLRQFRQVXOWH]QRWUHVLWHElectromenagersge.ca ou appelez OH9HXLOOH]DYRLUYRWUHQXPpURGHVpULHHWYRWUHQXPpURGHPRGqOHjSRUWpHGHPDLQORUVTXHYRXVDSSHOH]SRXU obtenir un service.

Pendant la période de :
Un An A compter de la date d’achat initial

GE Appliances remplacera
Toute pièce du congélateur qui s’avère défectueuse en raison d’un défaut de matériau ou de fabrication. Durant cette période de Un (1) an à partir de la date d’achat d’origine, GE Appliances décidera, à sa discrétion, de remplacer ou de réparer l’appareil défectueux. ‘DQVO¶pYHQWXDOLWpR*($SSOLDQFHVGpFLGHUDLWGHUpSDUHUO¶DSSDUHLOGXUDQWFHWWHSpULRGHGH garantie limitée de un (1) an, GE Appliances fournira toute pièce du congélateur qui s’avère GpIHFWXHXVHVXLWHjXQYLFHGHPDWLqUHRXGHIDEULFDWLRQHWDVVXPHUDWRXVOHVFRWVGHPDLQ d’oeuvre et de service associés au remplacement de la pièce défectueuse. Dans l’éventualité R*($SSOLDQFHVGpFLGHUDLWGHUHPSODFHUO¶DSSDUHLOGXUDQWFHWWHSpULRGHGHJDUDQWLHOLPLWpH de un (1) an, elle pourra procéder en vous remettant un certificat échangeable contre un produit de remplacement chez un détaillant.

Ce qui n’est pas couvert :

Toute visite à votre domicile pour vous expliquer le fonctionnement de l’appareil.
Mauvaise installation, livraison ou entretien. 7RXWHGpIHFWXRVLWpGXSURGXLWORUVTX¶LOHVWXWLOLVpGHIDoRQ
abusive, ou à des fins commerciales ou à toute autre fin que celle pour laquelle il a été conçu.
3HUWHGHVDOLPHQWVGHjODGpWHULRUDWLRQ
‘RPPDJHVXELDSUqVODOLYUDLVRQ
/HUHPSODFHPHQWGHVIXVLEOHVRXOHUpHQFOHQFKHPHQWGHV disjoncteurs.

7RXWGRPPDJHDXSURGXLWDWWULEXDEOHjXQDFFLGHQWXQ incendie, une inondation ou un cas de force majeure.
7RXWGRPPDJHGLUHFWRXLQGLUHFWDWWULEXDEOHjXQH défectuosité éventuelle de l’appareil.
/HVHUYLFHV¶LOHVWLPSRVVLEOHG¶DYRLUDFFqVDXSURGXLWSRXU ce faire.
/HVFRWVDVVRFLpVORUVTXH*(GpFLGHGHUHPHWWUHDX consommateur un certificat échangeable contre un produit de remplacement.

EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES TACITES – Votre recours exclusif est l’échange du produit suivant les modalités de la Garantie Limitée. Toutes garanties tacites, y compris les garanties de valeurs marchandes ou d’adéquation à des fins particulières, sont limitées à une durée d’un an ou à la durée la plus courte autorisée par la loi.

Pour les clients des États-Unis : &HWWHJDUDQWLHOLPLWpHHVWpWHQGXHjO¶DFKHWHXUG¶RULJLQHHWDX[SURSULpWDLUHVVXLYDQWVSRXUWRXW SURGXLWDFKHWpSRXUXQHXWLOLVDWLRQGRPHVWLTXHDX[eWDWV8QLV6LOHSURGXLWHVWLQVWDOOpGDQVXQHUpJLRQRQHVHWURXYHDXFXQ réparateur autorisé GE Appliances, vous devrez peut-être assumer les frais de transport ou apporter l’appareil à un centre de VHUYLFHDXWRULVp*($SSOLDQFHV(Q$ODVNDFHWWHJDUDQWLHOLPLWpHH[FOXWOHFRWG¶H[SpGLWLRQRXGHGpSDQQDJHjYRWUHGRPLFLOH
&HUWDLQVpWDWVQ¶DFFHSWHQWSDVG¶H[FOXVLRQRXGHOLPLWHVDX[GRPPDJHVLQGLUHFWVFRQVpFXWLIV&HUWDLQVGURLWVSDUWLFXOLHUV vous sont dévolus en vertu de la présente garantie limitée et peuvent s’accompagner d’autres droits qui varient selon votre lieu de résidence. Pour connaître vos droits juridiques, veuillez consulter le bureau local ou le bureau d’état des affaires aux consommateurs ou le Procureur Général de votre état.
Garant : États-Unis : GE Appliances, a Haier company Louisville, KY 40225
Pour les consommateurs canadiens: &HWWHJDUDQWLHHVWpWHQGXHjO¶DFKHWHXUG¶RULJLQHHWDX[SURSULpWDLUHVVXLYDQWVSRXUWRXW SURGXLWDFKHWpDX[&DQDGDSRXUXQHXWLOLVDWLRQGRPHVWLTXHDX&DQDGD/HVHUYLFHjGRPLFLOHHQYHUWXGHODJDUDQWLHVHUDIRXUQL GDQVOHVUpJLRQVRLOHVWGLVSRQLEOHHWR0&&RPPHUFLDO,QFHVWLPHUDLVRQQDEOHGHOHIRXUQLU
Garant Canada : MC Commercial Inc, Burlington, Ontario, L7R 5B6

$JUDIH]YRWUHIDFWXUHLFL3RXUEpQp¿FLHUGXVHUYLFHGHUpSDUDWLRQ sous garantie, une preuve de la date d’achat initial est nécessaire.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

11

SOUTIEN AU CONSOMMATEUR

Soutien au consommateur
Site Web de GE Appliances
Vous avez une question ou vous avez besoin d’aide pour votre appareil électroménager? Visitez le site Web de GE $SSOLDQFHVKHXUHVSDUMRXUWRXVOHVMRXUVGHO¶DQQpH9RXVSRXYH]DXVVLWURXYHUG¶DXWUHVIRUPLGDEOHVSURGXLWV *($SSOLDQFHVHWWLUHUDYDQWDJHGHWRXVQRVVHUYLFHVG¶DVVLVWDQFHHQOLJQH$X[eWDWV8QLVGEAppliances.com $X&DQDGDGEAppliances.ca
Enregistrez votre électroménager
(QUHJLVWUH]YRWUHQRXYHODSSDUHLOHQOLJQHDXPRPHQWTXLYRXVFRQYLHQWOHPLHX[/¶HQUHJLVWUHPHQWGHYRWUHSURGXLW dans les délais prescrits permet une meilleure communication et un service rapide, selon les modalités de votre garantie, si besoin est. Vous pouvez également envoyer par courrier la carte d’enregistrement pré-imprimée qui se trouve dans l’emballage de votre appareil. $X[eWDWV8QLVGEAppliances.com/register $X&DQDGDProdsupport.mabe.ca/crm/Products/ProductRegistration.aspx
Service de réparation
8QVHUYLFHGHUpSDUDWLRQH[SHUW*($SSOLDQFHVVHWURXYHjTXHOTXHVSDVGHFKH]YRXV5HQGH]YRXVVXUQRWUHVLWH et programmez, à votre convenance, une visite de réparation à n’importe quel jour de l’année. $X[eWDWV8QLVGEAppliances.com/service RXFRPSRVH]OHGXUDQWOHVKHXUHVQRUPDOHVGHEXUHDX $X&DQDGDGEAppliances.ca/en/support/service-requestRXFRPSRVH]OH
Prolongation de garantie
Procurez-vous une prolongation de garantie GE Appliances et informez-vous des rabais spéciaux en vigueur pendant la durée de votre garantie. Vous pouvez vous la procurer en ligne en tout temps. Les services GE $SSOLDQFHVVHURQWWRXMRXUVGLVSRQLEOHVDSUqVO¶H[SLUDWLRQGHODJDUDQWLH$X[eWDWV8QLV GEAppliances.com/extended-warrant yRXFRPSRVH]OHGXUDQWOHVKHXUHVQRUPDOHVGHEXUHDX $X&DQDGD GEAppliances.ca/en/support/purchase-extended-warrantyRXFRPSRVH]OH
Pièces et accessoires
Les personnes ayant les compétences requises pour réparer elles-mêmes leurs appareils peuvent recevoir GLUHFWHPHQWjODPDLVRQGHVSLqFHVRXDFFHVVRLUHVOHVFDUWHV9,6$0DVWHU&DUGHW’LVFRYHUVRQWDFFHSWpHV &RPPDQGH]HQOLJQHKHXUHVSDUMRXU $X[eWDWV8QLVGEApplianceparts.comRXSDUWpOpSKRQHDXGXUDQWOHVKHXUHVQRUPDOHVGHEXUHDX Les instructions contenues dans le présent manuel comportent des procédures que tout utilisateur peut effectuer. Les autres types de réparation doivent généralement être confiés à un technicien qualifié. Usez de prudence : une réparation ou un entretien mal effectués peuvent rendre l’utilisation de l’appareil dangereuse.
/HVFRQVRPPDWHXUVDX&DQDGDGRLYHQWFRQVXOWHUOHVSDJHVMDXQHVSRXUFRQQDvWUHOHFHQWUHGHVHUYLFH0DEHOH plus proche, visiter notre site Web au GEAppliances.ca/en/products/parts-filters-accessories ou composer le
Communiquez avec nous
Si vous n’êtes pas satisfait du service après-vente de GE Appliances, communiquez avec nous depuis notre site Web en fournissant tous les détails dont votre numéro de téléphone, ou écrivez à :
$X[eWDWV8QLV*HQHUDO0DQDJHU&XVWRPHU5HODWLRQV_*($SSOLDQFHV$SSOLDQFH3DUN_/RXLVYLOOH.< GEAppliances.com/contact
$X&DQDGD’LUHFWRU&RQVXPHU5HODWLRQV0DEH&DQDGD,QF_6XLWH)DFWRU/DQH_0RQFWRQ1%(&0 GEAppliances.ca/en/contact-us

12

49-1000422 Rev. 1

FREEZERS HORIZONTALES

INFORMACIÓN DE SEGURIDAD 3
USO DEL FREEZER. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Instrucciones para descongelar . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
ENTRETIEN ET NETTOYAGE . . . .7
INSTALACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
SOLUCIONAR PROBLEMAS . . .9
Características de funcionamiento normales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
GARAN T Í A LI M I T ADA . . . . . . . . .11
SERV I CI O AL CON SU M I DOR .12

MANUEL D’UTILISATION ET D’INSTALLATION
Modelo con descongela miento manual:
FCM5, FCM7
ESPAÑOL

Escriba los números de modelo y de serie aquí: Número de modelo : ______ Número de serie: _________ Los encontrará en una placa en la parte superior central detrás de la unidad
49-1000422 Rev. 1 05-22 GEA

GRACIAS POR HACER QUE GE APPLIANCES SEA PARTE DE SU HOGAR.
Ya sea que haya crecido usando GE Appliances, o que ésta es su primera vez, nos complace tenerlo en la familia.
Sentimos orgullo por el nivel de arte, innovación y diseño de cada uno de los electrodomésticos de GE Appliances, y creemos que usted también. Entre otras cosas, el registro de su electrodoméstico
asegura que podamos entregarle información importante del producto y detalles de la garantía cuando los necesite.
Registre su electrodoméstico GE ahora a través de Internet. Sitios Web y números telefónicos útiles están disponibles en la sección de Soporte para el Consumidor de este Manual del Propietario. También puede enviar una carta en la tarjeta de inscripción preimpresa que se incluye con el material embalado.

2

49-1000422 Rev. 1

INFORMACIÓN DE SEGURIDAD

INFORMACIÓN IMPORTANTE DE SEGURIDAD
LEA TODAS LAS INSTRUCCIONES ANTES DE USAR LA MÁQUINA

ADVERTENCIA $¿QGHUHGXFLUHOULHVJRGHLQFHQGLRH[SORVLyQGHVFDUJDVHOpFWULFDVROHVLRQHVDOXVDUVX
refrigerador, siga estas precauciones básicas de seguridad:

( VWHIUHH]HUVHGHEHUiLQVWDODUXELFDUDGHFXDGDPHQWH de acuerdo con las Instrucciones de Instalación antes de

$ ILQGHHYLWDUULHVJRVGHTXHORVQLxRVVXIUDQDVIL[LD o queden atrapados, retire la tapa del freezer antes de

ser usado.

deshacerse o dejar de usar el mismo.

‘ HVHQFKXIHHOIUHH]HUDQWHVGHKDFHUUHSDUDFLRQHVD sea reemplazar una lámpara de luz o hacer una limpieza. NOTA: La corriente que va al freezer no puede ser desconectada por ninguna configuración del panel de control. NOTA: Las reparaciones deberán ser realizadas por un Profesional del Servicio Técnico calificado.
5HHPSODFHWRGDVODVSLH]DVSDQHOHVDQWHVGHOXVR
0 DQWHQJDFXDOTXLHUPDWHULDOYDSRUHVLQIODPDEOHV alejados del refrigerador.
1 RJXDUGHVXVWDQFLDVH[SORVLYDVWDOHVFRPRODWDV de aerosoles con propelentes inflamables en este electrodoméstico.
1RXVHXQSURORQJDGRU

3 DUDHYLWDUOHVLRQHVJUDYHVRODPXHUWHORVQLxRVQRVH deberán parar sobre ni jugar en o con el electrodoméstico.
Los niños y las personas con capacidad física, sensorial o mental reducida o con falta de experiencia y conocimiento podrán usar este electrodoméstico sólo si son supervisados o les fueron dadas instrucciones sobre un uso seguro y entienden los riesgos involucrados.
Este electrodoméstico fue diseñado para uso hogareño y para aplicaciones similares tales como: áreas de personal de cocina en tiendas, oficinas y otros espacios laborales; casas de campo; por clientes en hoteles, moteles, hostales y otros espacios residenciales, catering y aplicaciones no minoristas similares.

PRECAUCIÓN Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones al usar el freezer, siga estas precauciones básicas.

1 ROLPSLHHOIUHH]HUFRQDJXDFDOLHQWHFXDQGRVH encuentre frío. Los componentes se pueden romper si son expuestos a cambios de temperatura repentinos o impactos, tales como sacudones o caídas.

1 RWRTXHODVVXSHUILFLHVIUtDVGHOFRPSDUWLPLHQWRGHO freezer cuando las manos estén húmedas o mojadas, ya que la piel se podrá adherir a estas superficies extremadamente frías.

0 DQWHQJDORVGHGRVIXHUDGHORVHVSDFLRVGH³ULHVJRGH lastimaduras”; los espacios de despeje entre la tapa y el gabinete son necesariamente pequeños. Tenga el cuidado de cerrar las puertas cuando haya niños dentro del área.

1 RYXHOYDDFRQJHODUFRPLGDVTXHKDDQHVWDGR totalmente congeladas en forma previa.

ADVERTENCIA

RIESGO DE INCENDIO O EXPLOSIÓN Refrigerantes Inflamables

Este electrodoméstico cuenta con refrigerante isobutano, también conocido como R600a, un gas natural con alto nivel de compatibilidad medioambiental. Sin embargo, también es combustible. Siga las advertencias que figuran a continuación, a fin de reducir el riesgo de lesiones o daños sobre la propiedad.
1. Al mover, instalar y operar el electrodoméstico, se deberá
tener cuidado de no dañar la tubería del refrigerante.
2. El servicio técnico sólo debe ser realizado por personal

4. Mantenga las aberturas de ventilación en el espacio de protección del electrodoméstico o en la estructura incorporada libres de obstrucción.
5. 1RXVHGLVSRVLWLYRVPHFiQLFRVXRWURVPHGLRVSDUD acelerar el proceso de descongela miento.
6. 1RGDxHHOFLUFXLWRGHOUHIULJHUDQWH 7. 1RXVHGLVSRVLWLYRVHOpFWULFRVGHQWURGHOFRPSDUWLPLHQWRGH
almacenamiento de comida del electrodoméstico.

autorizado del servicio. Use sólo piezas del servicio

autorizadas por el fabricante

3. ‘HVFDUWHHOHOHFWURGRPpVWLFRGHDFXHUGRFRQODV Regulaciones Federales y Locales. El refrigerante inflamable y el material aislante inflamable usados requieren procedimientos de descarte especiales. Comuníquese con las autoridades locales para descartar su electrodoméstico de forma ambientalmente segura.

LEA Y GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES

49-1000422 Rev. 1

3

INFORMACIÓN DE SEGURIDAD

INFORMACIÓN IMPORTANTE DE SEGURIDAD
LEA TODAS LAS INSTRUCCIONES ANTES DE USAR LA MÁQUINA

INSTALLATION

ADVERTENCIA

RIESGO DE INCENDIO O EXPLOSIÓN

Mantenga cualquier material y vapores inflamables alejados del freezer. Si no se cumple con esto se podrá producir una explosión, incendio o la muerte.

CONEXIÓN DE LA ELECTRICIDAD

ADVERTENCIA

RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA

Enchufe en un tomacorriente con conexión a tierra de 3 cables.

1RHOLPLQHHOFDEOHGHFRQH[LyQDWLHUUD

1RXVHXQDGDSWDGRU

1RXVHXQSURORQJDGRU

Si no se siguen estas instrucciones se podrá producir la muerte, incendios o descargas eléctricas.

Nunca, bajo ninguna circunstancia, corte o elimine el tercer cable (tierra) del cable de corriente. Para su seguridad personal, este electrodoméstico debe estar adecuadamente conectado a tierra.

El cable de corriente de este electrodoméstico cuenta con un enchufe de 3 cables (conexión a tierra) que se conecta a un tomacorriente de pared estándar de 3 cables (conexión a tierra) para minimizar la posibilidad de riesgos de descargas eléctricas por parte del mismo.
Contrate a un electricista calificado para que controle el tomacorriente y el circuito eléctrico, a fin de asegurar que el enchufe esté correctamente conectado a tierra.
En caso de contar con un tomacorriente de pared de 2 cables, es su responsabilidad y obligación reemplazarlo por un tomacorriente de pared de 3 cables correctamente FRQHFWDGRDWLHUUD1RXVHXQDGDSWDGRU
El freezer deberá estar siempre conectado a un enchufe específico con un índice de voltaje equivalente al que figura en la placa de calificación.

Se requiere un suministro eléctrico con fusible y conexión a tierra de 115 voltios de CA, 60 Hz, 15 o 20 amperes. Esto garantiza el mejor funcionamiento y además previene la sobrecarga de los circuitos del hogar, lo cual podría ocasionar riesgos de incendio debido al recalentamiento de cables.
1XQFDGHVHQFKXIHHOUHIULJHUDGRUWLUDQGRGHOFDEOHGH corriente. Siempre tome su enchufe firmemente y empuje el mismo hacia fuera para retirarlo.
Inmediatamente interrumpa el uso de un cable de suministro de corriente dañado. Si el cable de corriente se encuentra dañado, su reemplazo deberá ser realizado por un profesional calificado del servicio técnico, utilizando una pieza del servicio técnico autorizada por el fabricante.
Al alejar el freezer de la pared, se deberá tener cuidado de que no ruede sobre ni dañe el cable de corriente.

FORMA ADECUADA DE DESCARTAR SU ANTIGÜO CONGÉLATEUR

ADVERTENCIA PELIGRO DE SUFFOCATION Y ENTRAPMENT

El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones de eliminación puede causar la muerte o lesiones graves.

IMPORTANTE: Que un niño quede atrapado o que sufra una asfixia no son problemas del pasado. Los refrigeradores antiguos o abandonados aún son peligrosos, incluso aunque VHFRQVHUYHQSRU³VyORXQRVSRFRVGtDV´6LVHGHVKDUiGH su antiguo refrigerador, siga las siguientes instrucciones a fin de evitar accidentes.

Antes de Descartar su Antiguo Refrigerador o Congélateur:
Retire la tapa del congelador.
‘HMHORVHVWDQWHVHQVXOXJDUGHPRGRTXHORVQLxRVQR puedan trepar dentro con facilidad.

Cómo Eliminar Refrigerantes y Gomaespumas:
‘HVFDUWHHOHOHFWURGRPpVWLFRGHDFXHUGRFRQODV5HJXODFLRQHV)HGHUDOHV/RFDOHV(OUHIULJHUDQWHLQIODPDEOHHOPDWHULDO aislante inflamable usados requieren procedimientos de descarte especiales.. Comuníquese con las autoridades locales para descartar su electrodoméstico de forma ambiental mente segura.

LEA Y GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES

4

49-1000422 Rev. 1

USO DEL FREEZER

Uso del Freezer

Cómo poner el congelador en funcionamiento

1. Limpie el interior del freezer con una solución suave de bicarbonato y agua (consulte la sección de Cuidado y Limpieza).
2. Conecte el cable al tomacorriente.

3. Asegúrese de que el control de temperatura esté configurado en 4.
4. Permita que el freezer funcione durante por lo menos cuatro horas antes de colocar comida dentro del mismo.

Control de Temperatura
La selección de la temperatura de congelamiento se realiza configurando el control de “Min” a “Max” (lo más frío).
Si desea temperaturas más frías o más calientes, ajuste el control un paso por vez.
Espere varias horas luego de cada ajuste de a un paso, de modo que la temperatura del freezer se estabilice.
Girar el control a la posición OFF (Apagado) detiene el proceso de enfriamiento, pero no apaga el freezer.

Luz de Encendido (en algunos modelos)
La Luz de Encendido indica que el freezer está correctamente conectado a la corriente eléctrica. La luz brilla incluso cuando el control de temperatura se encuentra apagado.
Cerradura con Eyector de Llave
La cerradura posee un resorte, de modo que la llave no pueda ser dejada en la misma. Para bloquear o desbloquear, presione la llave mientras la esté girando. Si se pierde la llave, comuníquese con su vendedor para un reemplazo o visite GEApplianceParts.com. Al solicitar una llave de reemplazo, siempre dé los números de modelo y serie del freezer.
ADVERTENCIA
A fin de evitar que un niño quede atrapado, guarde la llave fuera del alcance de los niños y lejos del freezer.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

5

USO DEL FREEZER: Instrucciones para descongelar

Instrucciones para descongelar

En la mayoría de los climas, la descongelación será necesaria sólo dos veces por año.
Para que su freezer funcione de forma más eficiente, no permita que se acumule más de ½” (13 mm) de escarcha.

ADVERTENCIA RIESGO DE INCENDIO O
EXPLOSIÓN. 6HXVyXQUHIULJHUDQWHLQÀDPDEOH A fin de eliminar la escarcha, raspe con una espátula o raspador de plástico o madera. 1RXVHXQSLFRGHKLHORR un instrumento de metal con forma puntiaguda, ya que esto podrá perforar el revestimiento del freezer y luego la tubería refrigerante inflamable detrás de éste.
1RXVHQLQJ~QGLVSRVLWLYRHOpFWULFRSDUDGHVFRQJHODUVX refrigerador.

Para un descongelamiento completo
1. Gire la perilla de control de temperatura a la posición OFF (Apagar) y desenchufe el freezer.
2. Retire toda la comida y coloque la misma en cajas de cartón corrugado, bolsas con aislante, refrigeradores para picnic, etc. Use toallas y papeles de diario como aislante, según sea necesario.
3. Con la puerta/ tapa abierta, use ollas con agua caliente para que la escarcha se afloje de forma rápida. Retire las piezas grandes antes de que se derritan.
Los modelos con baúl cuenta con un drenaje del agua descongelada en el frente. Retire la tapa del desagüe de la descongelación desde la parte exterior y el tapón de desagüe dentro del gabinete.
NOTA: Podrá gotear agua del reborde trasero del protector de la tapa durante el descongelamiento. Esto es normal. El hielo se acumula en el aislante de la tapa cuando la misma es abierta para agregar o retirar comida, y se derrite al realizar la descongelación.

4. Retire el excedente de agua con una esponja del fondo del freezer a medida que se vaya acumulando, a fin de evitar desbordes.
5. Luego de la descongelación, limpie el interior del freezer (lea la sección Cuidado y Limpieza).
6. Reemplace el enchufe del drenaje dentro del gabinete y la tapa en el drenaje de descongelación. Pliegue y seque la junta del lado de la tapa donde se encuentra la bisagra.
7. Enchufe el freezer. Regrese el control de temperatura a su posición previa y vuelva a colocar la comida en el freezer.

6

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CUIDADO Y LIMPIEZA

Cuidado y limpieza

Limpieza del congelador
Exterior. Proteja el acabado de pintura. El acabado del exterior del congelador es un acabado de pintura curada de alta calidad. Con el cuidado apropiado, se conservará como nueva y sin óxido durante años. Aplique una capa de cera para pulir aparatos cuando el congelador es nuevo y luego, por lo menos dos veces al año. También se recomienda usar cera para pulir aparatos para retirar los residuos de cinta de las superficies del congelador.
Mantenga limpio el acabado. Use un paño limpio ligeramente humedecido en cera para pulir aparatos o detergente líquido suave para lavar platos. Seque y pula FRQXQSDxRVXDYHOLPSLR1ROLPSLHHOFRQJHODGRUFRQ XQSDxRSDUDODYDUSODWRVVXFLRRXQDWRDOODK~PHGD1R use esponjas limpiadoras, limpiadores en polvo, lejía o limpiadores que contengan lejías.
AVISO: Se deben tomar precauciones al separar el congelador de la pared. Es posible que se dañen todos los tipos de coberturas para pisos, especialmente las coberturas acolchadas y las que tienen superficies en relieve.

,nterior. Limpie el interior del congelador por lo menos una vez al año. Recomendamos desenchufar el congelador antes de limpiarlo. Si no fuera posible, exprima el exceso de humedad de la esponja o del paño cuando se limpie alrededor de botones, bombillas o controles.
Use agua caliente y una solución de bicarbonato de sodio– aproximadamente una cucharada (15 ml) de bicarbonato de sodio por cada cuarto (1 litro) de agua. Enjuague bien FRQDJXDVHTXH1RXVHSROYRVOLPSLDGRUHVQLRWURV OLPSLDGRUHVDEUDVLYRV12ODYHSLH]DVGHVPRQWDEOHV en el lavavajillas.
Una caja de bicarbonato de sodio abierta absorberá los olores viciados del congelador. Cambie la caja cada tres meses.

En caso de interrupción prolongada del suministro eléctrico

0DQWHQJDODWDSDGHOFRQJHODGRUFHUUDGD(OFRQJHODGRU mantendrá los alimentos congelados durante 24 horas siempre que no permita el ingreso de aire cálido.
6LHOFRQJHODGRUQRUHFLEHHQHUJtDGXUDQWHKRUDVR PiVDJUHJXHKLHORVHFR’HMHHOKLHORHQWUR]RVJUDQGHV Agregue más hielo según sea necesario.

PRECAUCIÓN La manipulación de hielo seco puede
causar congelamiento en las manos; se recomienda el uso de guantes o de otro tipo de protección.
6LQRHVSRVLEOHFRQVHJXLUKLHORVHFRWUDVODGHORVDOLPHQWRV a un armario para alimentos congelados hasta que se restablezca el suministro eléctrico.

En caso de mudanza
Gire el control de temperatura hasta OFF (Apagado). ‘HVFRQHFWHHOHQFKXIHGHDOLPHQWDFLyQGHOWRPDFRUULHQWHGH pared. Retire los alimentos, descongele (en los modelos con ‘HVFRQJHODPLHQWRPDQXDOOLPSLHHOFRQJHODGRU
Asegure todos los elementos sueltos como canastas pegándolos con cinta adhesiva en su lugar para evitar daños.

Asegúrese de que el freezer permanezca en la posición de parado durante la mudanza y en el vehículo. El freezer debe estar asegurado en el vehículo a fin de evitar movimientos. Proteja el exterior del congelador con una manta.

Preparación para vacaciones
A fin de mantener el freezer en funcionamiento durante las vacaciones, asegúrese de que la corriente de su casa no sea desconectada. Para una protección segura de los componentes del freezer, es recomendable solicitar a un vecino que controle el suministro de corriente y el funcionamiento del freezer cada 48 horas.
En caso de vacaciones o ausencias prolongadas, es preferible mover las comidas congeladas a un casillero de almacenamiento de forma temporaria. Si dejará el freezer vacío, desconecte el cable de corriente del tomacorriente. Para evitar la formación de olores, coloque una caja abierta de bicarbonato de sodio en el freezer y deje su puerta/ tapa abierta.

Cuando el freezer no esté en funcionamiento, se podrá dejar en una casa o habitación sin calefacción sin que se produzcan daños sobre el gabinete o el mecanismo.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

7

INSTALACIÓN

Pasos previos a la instalación

Lea estas instrucciones por completo y con cuidado.

Ubicación del congelador

El freezer deberá ser convenientemente ubicado para el uso diario en un lugar seco y con buena ventilación.
1RLQVWDOHHOIUHH]HUHQOXJDUHVGRQGHODWHPSHUDWXUDVHD inferior a 0ºF o superior a los 110ºF, ya que esto impedirá que se mantengan las temperaturas adecuadas.
Asegúrese de instalar el freezer en un piso lo suficientemente fuerte como para darle un buen apoyo cuando esté completamente lleno.

1RLQVWDOHHOIUHH]HUHQXQDXELFDFLyQH[SXHVWDDODJXDGH lluvia o en contacto directo con la luz solar.
El freezer deberá estar posicionado de forma sólida en el piso, si funcionará en su máxima capacidad. Su freezer cuenta con patas niveladores ajustables que pueden ser giradas para un posicionamiento sólido en caso de que el piso esté desnivelado. Si el lugar elegido para el freezer posee humedad, coloque soportes de 2 x 4 (51 mm x 102 mm) debajo de toda su longitud para asegurar un apoyo adecuado.

Despejes
En todos los modelos, deje 3″ (76 mm) en la parte superior, trasera y lateral para una circulación apropiada de aire.’HMH suficiente espacio sobre la parte superior de la tapa para abrir la misma
Retiro de la Tapa
PRECAUCIÓN RIESGO AL LEVANTAR La tapa es pesada.Use ambas manos para asegurar la tapa antes de levantar la misma.
PRECAUCIÓN RESORTE DE LA BISAGRA BAJO TENSIÓN Si es necesario retirar la tapa, siga estos pasos:
1. Retire cada una de las tapas de la bisagra superior, tomando los costados y empujando hacia arriba. Retire cada una de las tapas de la bisagra inferior, tomando los costados y empujando hacia abajo.
Tapa de la Bisagra Superior

2. Abra la tapa hasta su posición máxima. (Las bisagras quedan de la forma más suelta en esta posición).
3. Afloje, sin retirar, los 4 tornillos de la parte inferiorde la bisagra que se encuentra montada al gabinete.

Tornillos de la bisagra que VHUiQDÀRMDGRV

Tornillos de la bisagra que VHUiQDÀRMDGRV

Tapa de la Bisagra Inferior

4. Levante la tapa hasta que los tornillos queden alineados con las aberturas ranuradas más grandes en la parte inferior de la bisagra. Cada bisagra aún se encuentra adherida a la tapa por los 4 tornillos.
5. Para reinstalar la tapa, siga los pasos de modo inverso. Ajuste todos los tornillos de las bisagras, pero no ajuste en exceso para evitar dañar la capa de pintura. Reinstale las tapas de las bisagras.

8

49-1000422 Rev. 1

CONSEJOS PARA LA SOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS

Consejos para la Solución de Problemas… Antes de solicitar el servicio técnico

¡Ahorre tiempo y dinero! Primero revise los cuadros que aparecen en las siguientes páginas y es posible que no necesite solicitar reparaciones.

Problema
El congelador no funciona o la Luz de encendido está apagada
El congelador arranca/ se detiene con demasiada frecuencia
El congelador opera demasiado tiempo
Funcionamiento ruidoso o el gabinete vibra
La temperatura del congelador es demasiado alta Los alimentos se descongelan
La temperatura del congelador es demasiado baja Se forma humedad en la parte externa del gabinete

Causas Posibles
El control de temperatura está en la posición OFF. El congelador está desenchufado. Fusible fundido/interruptor de circuito roto. Se dejó la puerta/ tapa abierta.
Abrir la tapa con mucha frecuencia o por mucho tiempo. El control del temperatura está en un nivel demasiado frío. Se dejó la tapa abierta. Abrir la tapa con mucha frecuencia o por mucho tiempo. El control del temperatura está en un nivel demasiado frío. El espacio para circulación de aire alrededor del gabinete no es adecuado. El piso posiblemente sea débil, lo que hace que el congelador vibre cuando funciona el compresor. El gabinete no está firme en el piso.
Se dejó la tapa abierta. Abrir la tapa con mucha frecuencia o por mucho tiempo. El control de temperatura está en la posición OFF. El congelador está desenchufado.
Fusible fundido/interruptor de circuito roto. Se dejó la tapa abierta. Abrir la tapa con mucha frecuencia o por mucho tiempo. El control del temperatura está en un nivel demasiado frío.
No es extraño durante períodos de alta humedad.

Qué hacer
Mueva el control a una configuración de temperatura.
Empuje la clavija completamente en el enchufe. Reemplace el fusible o reajuste el interruptor.
Controle que no haya paquetes que impidan que la puerta/ tapa se cierre. Abra la tapa con menos frecuencia.
Vea Uso del Freezer
Revise si hay un paquete que mantiene la tapa abierta. Abra la tapa con menos frecuencia.
Vea Uso del Freezer
Vea Pasos previos a la instalación
Asegúrese de que el freezer esté ubicado en un piso sólido y use cuñas, según sea necesario, para nivelar la unidad.
Consulte la sección sobre Preparación para la instalación del freezer. Use cuñas, según sea necesario, para nivelar la unidad. Revise si hay un paquete que mantiene la tapa abierta. Abra la tapa con menos frecuencia.
Gire el control de temperatura hasta una configuración entre 1 y 7 Empuje la clavija completamente en el enchufe. Reemplace el fusible o reajuste el interruptor.
Revise si hay un paquete que mantiene la tapa abierta. Abra la tapa con menos frecuencia.
Vea Uso del Freezer
Seque la superficie con un paño suave.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

9

CONSEJOS PARA LA SOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS

Consejos para la Solución de Problemas… Antes de solicitar el servicio técnico

Problema La luz interior no funciona (en algunos modelos).
La tapa no se cierra completamente sola Tiempo de arranque lento después de estar desconectado Acumulación excesiva de escarcha

Causas Posibles No hay corriente en el tomacorriente. El freezer se encuentra desenchufado.
La lámpara se quemó. Paquete mantiene la tapa abierta.

Qué hacer Reemplace los fusibles o reinicie el disyuntor. Presione el enchufe completamente dentro del tomacorriente. Reemplace la lámpara. Mueva el paquete a una ubicación diferente.

Protección contra sobrecarga incorporada.

Esto es normal luego de estar apagado.

Se dejó la tapa abierta.
Abrir la tapa con mucha frecuencia o por mucho tiempo. No es extraño durante períodos de alta humedad.

Revise si hay un paquete que mantiene la tapa abierta. Abra la tapa con menos frecuencia.
Seque la superficie.

NOTA: 1RGHYXHOYDHOIUHH]HUDODWLHQGDGRQGHORDGTXLULy8VWHGFXHQWDFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFRHQHOKRJDUSDUDHVWHIUHH]HU Para el servicio de garantía, comuníquese con nosotros a través de GEAppliances.com, o llamando al 800.GE.CARES (U.S.), o 1.800.561.3344 (Canadá).

Características de funcionamiento normales

Todo esto es normal y no indica necesidad de servicio.
*DELQHWHH[WHULRUWLELRDPHGLGDTXHHOVLVWHPDGH refrigeración transfiere calor desde el interior hacia el exterior a través de las paredes externas del gabinete.
6RQLGRGHPRWRUFRPSUHVRUGHDOWDHILFLHQFLD

10

49-1000422 Rev. 1

GARANTÍA LIMITADA

Garantía limitada del congélateur

GEAppliances.com
Todo el servicio de garantía es provisto por nuestros Centros de Servicio de Fabricación, o un técnico autorizado de Servicio al Cliente (Customer Care®). Para programar una visita del servicio técnico, visítenos en GEAppliances.com/service, o comuníquese al 800.
GE.CARES (800.432.2737). Cuando llame para solicitar el servicio, tenga los números de serie y modelo disponibles.

Por el Período de:
Un Año ‘HVGHODIHFKDGHOD compra original

GE Appliances Reemplazará
&XDOTXLHUSLH]DGHOIUHH]HUTXHIDOOHGHELGRDXQGHIHFWRHQORVPDWHULDOHVRODIDEULFDFLyQ’XUDQWHHVWH período de Un Año desde la fecha de compra original, GE Appliances elegirá, de acuerdo a su decisión, UHHPSOD]DURUHDOL]DUHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFRVREUHODXQLGDGGHIHFWXRVD’XUDQWHHVWDJDUDQWtDOLPLWDGDGHXQ año, si GE Appliances decide realizar el servicio técnico sobre la unidad, GE Appliances brindará cualquier pieza del freezer que falle debido a un defecto en los materiales o la fabricación y, sin costo, todos los VHUYLFLRVUHODFLRQDGRVFRQHOUHHPSOD]RGHODSLH]DGHIHFWXRVD’XUDQWHHVWDJDUDQWtDOLPLWDGDGHXQDxR si GE Appliances decide reemplazar la unidad, puede hacer esto brindándole un certificado reembolsable en una tienda minorista por un producto de reemplazo.

Qué No Cubrirá GE Appliances:
Viajes del técnico del servicio a su hogar para enseñarle sobre cómo usar el producto.
Instalación inadecuada, entrega o mantenimiento. Fallas del producto en caso de abuso, mal uso, o uso
para propósitos diferentes al original o uso comercial. Pérdida de alimentos por mal estado. Daño causado después de la entrega. Reemplazo de fusibles de la casa o reinicio de
disyuntores.

Daños ocasionados sobre el producto por accidente, incendio, inundaciones o catástrofes naturales.
Daños consecuentes o incidentales causados por posibles defectos de este producto.
Producto no accesible para brindar el servicio requerido. Costos asociados cuando GE decide entregar al
consumidor un certificado como forma de reemplazo del producto.

EXCLUSIÓN DE GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS–Su único y exclusivo derecho es la reparación del producto, tal y como se indica en esta Garantía limitada. Cualquier garantía implícita, incluyendo las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad o adecuación para un fin determinado, están limitadas a un año o el período de tiempo más breve permitido por la ley.
Para los clientes de EE.UU. Esta garantía limitada se extiende al comprador original y a cualquier dueño subsiguiente de productos comprados para uso hogareño dentro de EE.UU. Si el producto está en un área donde no se encuentra disponible un Proveedor Autorizado del Servicio Técnico de GE Appliances, usted será responsable por el costo de un viaje o se podrá requerir que traiga el producto a una ubicación del Servicio Técnico de GE Appliances Autorizado para recibir el servicio. En Alaska, la garantía limitada excluye el costo de envío o llamadas del servicio a su hogar.
Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños fortuitos o consecuentes. Esta garantía limitada le da derechos legales específicos y es posible que tenga otros derechos legales que varían entre un estado y otro. Para conocer cuáles son sus derechos legales, consulte a la oficina de asuntos del consumidor local o estatal o al Fiscal de su estado.
Garante US: GE Appliances, a Haier company Louisville, KY 40225
Para Clientes en Canadá: Esta garantía se extiende al comprador original y a cualquier dueño subsiguiente de productos comprados para uso hogareño dentro de Canadá. El servicio técnico hogareño de la garantía será brindado en áreas donde MC Commercial Inc. se encuentre disponible y lo considere apropiado.
Warrantor Canada: MC Commercial Inc., Burlington, Ontario, L7R 5B6

Abroche su recibo aquí. Para acceder al servicio técnico de acuerdo con la garantía deberá contar con la prueba de la fecha original de compra.

49-1000422 Rev. 1

11

SOPORTE PARA EL CONSUMIDOR

Soporte para el Consumidor
Sitio Web de GE Appliances
¢’HVHDUHDOL]DUXQDFRQVXOWDRQHFHVLWDDXGDFRQVXHOHFWURGRPpVWLFR”£,QWHQWHDWUDYpVGHO6LWLR:HEGH*($SSOLDQFHVODV 24 horas del día, cualquier día del año! Usted también puede comprar más electrodomésticos maravillosos de GE Appliances y aprovechar todos nuestros servicios de soporte a través de Internet, diseñados para su conveniencia. En EE.UU.: GEAppliances.com
Registre su Electrodoméstico
¡Registre su electrodoméstico nuevo a través de Internet, según su conveniencia! Un registro puntual de su producto permitirá una mejor comunicación y un servicio más puntual de acuerdo con los términos de su garantía, en caso de surgir la necesidad. También puede enviar una carta en la tarjeta de inscripción preimpresa que se incluye con el material embalado. En EE.UU.: GEAppliances.com/register
Servicio Programado
El servicio de reparación de expertos de GE Appliances está a sólo un paso de su puerta. Conéctese a través de Internet y programe su servicio a su conveniencia cualquier día del año. En EE.UU.: GEAppliances.com/service o comuníquese al 800.432.2737 durante el horario de atención comercial.
Garantías Extendidas
Adquiera una garantía extendida de GE Appliances y conozca los descuentos especiales que están disponibles mientras su garantía aún está vigente. La puede adquirir en cualquier momento a través de Internet. Los servicios de GE Appliances aún estarán allí cuando su garantía caduque. En EE.UU.: GEAppliances.com/extended-warranty o comuníquese al 800.626.2224 durante el horario de atención comercial.
Piezas y Accesorios
Aquellos individuos calificados para realizar el servicio técnico de sus propios electrodomésticos podrán solicitar el envío de SLH]DVRDFFHVRULRVGLUHFWDPHQWHDVXVKRJDUHVVHDFHSWDQODVWDUMHWDV9,6$0DVWHU&DUG’LVFRYHU2UGHQHKRDWUDYpVGH Internet durante las 24 horas, todos los días. En EE.UU.: GEApplianceparts.com o de forma telefónica al 877.959.8688 durante el horario de atención comercial. Las instrucciones que figuran en este manual cubren los procedimientos que serán realizados por cualquier usuario. Otros servicios técnicos generalmente deben ser derivados a personal calificado del servicio. Se deberá tener cuidado, ya que una reparación indebida podrá hacer que el funcionamiento no sea seguro.
Contáctenos
Si no se encuentra satisfecho con el servicio que recibió de GE Appliances, comuníquese con nosotros a través de nuestro sitio Web con todos los detalles, incluyendo su número telefónico, o escriba a: En EE.UU.: General Manager, Customer Relations | GE Appliances, Appliance Park | Louisville, KY 40225 GEAppliances.com/servic

12

49-1000422 Rev. 1

]]> ge appliances JVM7195 MICROWAVE OVEN Manual https://usemanuals.com/ge-appliances/jvm7195-oven/ Sat, 01 Jul 2023 16:47:17 +0000 https://usemanuals.com/?p=137048 Read More...

]]>

OWNER’S MANUAL
JVM7195
JNM7196
MICROWAVE OVEN

Write the model and serial numbers here:
Model # _________________
Serial # _________________
You can find them on a label inside the oven.
GE is a trademark of the General Electric Company. Manufactured under trademark license.
49-7000093 Rev. 1 03-22 GEA
internet GEAppliances.com.
THANK YOU FOR MAKING GE APPLIANCES A PART OF YOUR HOME.

Whether you grew up with GE Appliances, or this is your first, we’re happy to have you in the family.
We take pride in the craftsmanship, innovation and design that goes into every GE Appliances product, and we think you will too. Among other things, registration of your appliance ensures that we can deliver important product information and warranty details when you need them. Register your GE appliance now online. Helpful websites and phone numbers are available in the Consumer Support section of this Owner’s Manual. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration card included in the packing material.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THE APPLIANCE

SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING To reduce the risk of burns, electric shock, fire, injury to persons, or exposure to excessive microwave energy:
When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should be followed, including the following:

  • Read all instructions before using this appliance.
  • Read and follow the specific precautions in the PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY section on page 5.
  • Use this appliance only for its intended use as described in this manual. Do not use corrosive chemicals or vapors in this appliance. This oven is specifically designed to heat, dry or cook food, and is not intended for laboratory or industrial use.
  • This microwave must only be serviced by qualified service personnel. Contact nearest authorized service facility for examination, repair or adjustment.

INSTALLATION

  • Install or locate this appliance only in accordance with the provided installation instructions.
  • This appliance must be grounded. Connect only to properly grounded outlet. See “GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS” found on page 5.
  • This microwave oven is ETL listed for installation over both gas and electric ranges.
  • This unit is suitable for use above gas or electric cooking equipment, 36” or less wide.
  • Do not operate this appliance if it has a damaged power cord or plug, if it is not working properly, or if it has been damaged or dropped.
  • Keep cord away from heated surfaces.
  • Do not let cord hang over the edge of the table or counter
  • Do not immerse cord or plug in water.
  • Do not cover or block any openings on the appliance.
  • Do not store this appliance outdoors. Do not use this product near water—for example, in a wet basement, near a swimming pool, near a sink or in similar locations.
  • Do not mount this appliance over a sink.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE IN THE CAVITY:

  • Do not overcook food. Carefully attend to appliances when paper, plastic or other combustible materials are placed inside the oven to facilitate cooking.
  • Remove wire twist-ties and metal handles from paper or plastic containers before placing them in the oven.
  • Do not store any materials, other than our recommended accessories, in this oven when not in use. Do not leave paper products, cooking utensils or food in the cavity when not in use. The microwave rack should be removed from oven when not in use.
  • If materials inside the oven ignite, keep the oven door closed, turn the oven off and disconnect the power cord or shut off power at the fuse or circuit breaker panel.
  • Do not operate the microwave feature without food in the oven.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF BURNS:

  • Be careful when opening containers of hot food. Use pot holders and direct steam away from face and hands.
  • Vent, pierce, or slit containers, pouches, or plastic bags to prevent build-up of pressure.
  • Be careful when touching the turntable, door, racks, or walls of the oven which may become hot during use.
  • HOT CONTENTS CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO USE THE MICROWAVE. Use caution when removing hot items.

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING Continued
OPERATING

  • Do not operate the oven without the turntable in place. The turntable must be unrestricted so it can turn.
  • Make sure all cookware used in your microwave oven is suitable for microwaving. Most glass casseroles, cooking dishes, measuring cups, custard cups, pottery, or china dinnerware, which does not have metallic trim or glaze with a metallic sheen can be used in compliance with cookware manufacturers’ recommendations.
  • Do not store anything directly on top of the microwave surface when the microwave is in operation.
  • Some products such as whole eggs and sealed containers – for example, closed jars – are able to explode and should not be heated in the microwave oven.
  • Do not overcook potatoes. They could dehydrate and catch fire.
  • Do not cover any other part of the oven with metal foil. This will cause overheating of the oven.
  • Cook meat and poultry thoroughly—meat to at least an INTERNAL temperature of 160°F and poultry to atleast an INTERNAL temperature of 180°F. Cooking to these temperatures usually protects against foodborne illness.
  • This oven is not approved or tested for marine use.

CLEANING

  • Keep the oven free from grease buildup.
  • Do not clean with metal scouring pads. Pieces can burn off the pad and touch electrical parts involving  risk of electric shock.
  • When cleaning surfaces of door and oven that come together on closing the door, use only mild, nonabrasive soaps, or detergents applied with a clean sponge or soft cloth. Rinse well.

SUPERHEATED WATER

  • Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea, are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present. THIS COULD RESULT IN VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID.
  • To reduce the risk of injury to persons:
    – Do not overheat the liquid.
    – Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it.
    – Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks.
    – After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container.
    – Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container.

VENT FAN
The fan will operate automatically under certain conditions.
Take care to prevent the starting and spreading of accidental cooking fires while the vent fan is in use.

  • Clean the underside of the microwave often. Do not allow grease to build up on the microwave or the fan filters.
  • In the event of a grease fire on the surface units below the microwave oven, smother a flaming pan on the surface unit by covering the pan completely with a lid, a cookie sheet or a flat tray.
  • Use care when cleaning the vent fan filters. Corrosive cleaning agents, such as lye-based oven cleaners, may damage the filters.
  • When preparing flaming foods under the microwave, turn the fan on.
  • Never leave surface units beneath your microwave oven unattended at high heat settings. Boilovers cause smoking and greasy spillovers that may ignite and spread if the microwave vent fan is operating. To minimize automatic fan operation, use adequate== sized cookware and use high heat on surface units only when necessary.

PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY

(a) Do Not Attempt to operate this oven with the door open since open-door operation can result in harmful exposure to microwave energy. It is important not to defeat or tamper with the safety interlocks.
(b) Do Not Place any object between the oven front face and the door or allow soil or cleaner residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces.
(c) Do Not Operate the oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the oven door close properly and that there is no damage to the:
(1) door (bent),
(2)  hinges and latches (broken or loosened),
(3) door seals and sealing surfaces.
(d) The Oven Should Not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except properly qualified service personnel.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING Improper use of the grounding plug can result in a risk of electric shock.

Ensure Proper ground exists before use.

This appliance must be grounded. In the event of an  electrical short circuit, grounding reduces the risk of electric shockby providing an escape wire for the electric current.
This appliance is equipped with a power cord having a grounding wire with a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an outlet that is properly installed and grounded.
Consult a qualified electrician or service technician if the GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS are not completely understood, or if doubt exists as to whether the appliance is properly grounded.
If the outlet is a standard 2-prong wall outlet, it is your personal responsibility and obligation to have it replaced with a properly grounded 3-prong wall outlet.
Do not under any circumstances cut or remove the third (ground) prong from the power cord.
Do not use an extension cord. If the power cord is too short, have a qualified electrician or service technician install an outlet near the appliance.
For best operation, plug this appliance into its own electrical outlet to prevent flickering of lights, blowing of fuse or tripping of circuit breaker.
PACEMAKERS
Most pacemakers are shielded from interference from electronic products, including microwaves. However, patients with pacemakers may wish to consult their physicians if they have concerns.

USING YOUR OVEN: Controls
Controls
Throughout this manual, features and appearance may vary from your model.
1000 Watts

  1. Door Handle. Pull to open the door. The door must be securely latched for the microwave to operate.
  2. Door Latches.
  3. Window with Metal Shield. Screen allows cooking to be viewed while keeping microwaves confined in the oven.
  4. Touch Control Panel.
  5. Cooktop Light.
  6. Grease Filter
  7.  Removable Turntable. Turntable and support must be in place when using the oven. The turntable may be removed for cleaning.
  8. Rating Plate.

NOTE: Oven vent(s) and oven light are located on the inside walls of the microwave oven.
Controls
You can microwave by time or with the sensor features. Not all features on all models.

Cooking Controls
Check the Convenience Guide before you begin.

1.

Time Features
Press Enter
Cook Time Amount of cooking time
Express Cook Starts Immediately!
Add 30 Sec Starts Immediately!
Power Level Power
Defrost Weight/Time Amount of defrosting weight/time

2.

Sensor Features
Press Enter
Popcorn Starts immediately!
Beverage Starts immediately!
Reheat Food
Potato Starts Immediately!

USING YOUR OVEN

Features

Changing the Power Level
The power level may be entered or changed immediately after entering the feature time for Cook Time, Time
Defrost, Add 30 Sec or Express Cook. The power level may also be changed during the time countdown.

  1. Press Cook Time.
  2. Enter cooking or defrosting time
  3. Press Power Level.
  4. Select desired power level 1-10.
  5. Press Start/Pause. Pressing Start/Pause is not necessary for Express Cook buttons.

Variable power levels add flexibility to microwave cooking. The power levels on the microwave oven can be compared to the surface units on a range. Each power level gives you microwave energy a certain percent of the time. Power level 7 is microwave energy 70% of the time. Power level 3 is energy 30% of the time. Most cooking will be done on HI which gives you 100% power.
Power Level 10 will cook faster but food may need more frequent stirring, rotating or turning over. A lower setting will cook more evenly and need less stirring or rotating of the food.
Some foods may have better flavor, texture or appearance if one of the lower settings is used. Use a lower power level when cooking foods that have a tendency to boil over, such as scalloped potatoes. Rest periods (when the microwave energy cycles off) give time for the food to “equalize” or transfer heat to the inside of the food. An example of this is shown with power level 3—the defrost cycle. If microwave energy did not cycle off, the outside of the food would cook before the inside was defrosted.
Here are some examples of uses for various power levels:
Power Level 10: Fish, bacon, vegetables, boiling liquids.
Power Level 7: Gentle cooking of meat and poultry; baking casseroles and reheating.
Power Level 5: Slow cooking and tenderizing for stews and less tender cuts of meat.
Power Level 2 or 3: Defrosting; simmering; delicate sauces.
Power Level 1: Keeping food warm; softening butter.

Time Features
Cook Time I
Allows you to microwave for any time up to 99 minutes and 99 seconds.
Power level 10 (high) is automatically set, but you may change it for more flexibility.

  1. Press Cook Time.
  2. Enter cooking time.
  3. Change power level if you don’t want full power(Press Power Level. Select a desired power level 1–10.)
  4. Press Start/Pause.

You may open the door during Cook Time to check the food. Close the door and press Start/Pause to resume cooking.

Cook Time II
Lets you change power levels automatically during cooking. Here’s how to do it:

  1.  Press Cook Time.
  2. Enter the first cook time.
  3. Change the power level if you don’t want full power. (Press Power Level. Select a desired power level 1–10.)
  4. Press Cook Time again.
  5. Enter the second cook time.
  6. Change the power level if you don’t want full power. (Press Power Level. Select a desired power level 1–10.)
  7. Press Start/Pause. At the end of Cook Time I, Cook Time II counts down.

Time Features
Express Cook
This is a quick way to set cooking time for 1-5 minutes.
Press one of the Express Cook pads (from 1 to 5) for 1 to 5 minutes of cooking at power level 10. For example, press the 2 pad for 2 minutes of cooking time. The power level can be changed as time is counting down. Press POWER LEVEL and enter 1-10.

Add 30 Sec
You can use this feature two ways:

  • It will add 30 seconds to the time  counting down each time the pad is pressed.
  • It can be used as a quick way to set 30 seconds of cooking time.  Start Pause

Time Features
Weight Defrost
The Defrost WeightTime feature gives you two ways to defrost food.
Press Defrost WeightTime once for weight defrost or twice for Time Defrost.
Use Weight Defrost for meat, poultry and fish up to  6 pounds.
Use Time Defrost for most other frozen foods.
Weight Defrost automatically sets the defrosting times and  power levels to give even defrosting results for meats,poultry and fish.

  1. Press Defrost Weight/Time once.
  2. Using the conversion guide, enter food weight. For example, press pads 1 and 2 for 1.2 pounds (1 pound, 3 ounces).
  3. Press Start/Pause. (Time Defrost is explained in the Time Features section.)
  • Remove meat from package and place on microwavesafe dish.
  • When the oven signals, turn the food over. Remove defrosted meat or shield warm areas with small pieces of foil.
  • After defrosting, most meats need to stand 5 minutes to complete defrosting. Large roasts should stand for about 30 minutes. 
If the weight of food is stated in pounds and ounces, the ounces must be converted to tenths (.1) of a pound.
 Ounces Pounds
 1–2 0.1
3 0.2
 4–5 0.3
 6–7 0.4
8 0.5
 9–10 0.6
11 0.7
 12–13 0.8
 14–15 0.9

Time Defrost
Time Defrost allows you to defrost for a selected length of time. See the Defrosting Guide for suggested times. (Weight Defrost is explained in the Auto Feature section.)

  1.  Press Defrost Weight/ Time twice.
  2. Enter defrosting time.
  3.  Press Start/Pause.
  4.  Turn food over when the oven signal.
  5. Press Start/Pause.

When the oven signals,
turn food over and break apart or rearrange pieces for more even defrosting. Shield any warm areas with small pieces of foil. The oven will continue to defrost if you don’t open the door and turn the food.
Power level is automatically set at 3, but can be changed. You can defrost small items quickly by raising the power level after entering the time. Power level 7 cuts the total defrosting time in about half; power level 10cuts the total time to approximately 1/3. However, food will need more frequent attention than usual.
A dull thumping noise may be heard during defrosting. This is normal when oven is not operating at High power.

Defrosting Tips

  • Foods frozen in paper or plastic can be defrosted in the package. Closed packages should be slit, pierced or vented AFTER food has partially defrosted. Plastic storage containers should be partially uncovered.
  • Family-size, prepackaged frozen dinners can be defrosted and microwaved. If the food is in a foil container, transfer it to a microwave-safe dish.
  • For more even defrosting of larger foods, such as roasts, use Defrost Weight. Be sure large meats are completely defrosted before cooking.
  • Foods that spoil easily should not be allowed to sit out for more than one hour after defrosting. Room temperature promotes the growth of harmful bacteria.
  • When defrosted, food should be cool but softened in all areas. If still slightly icy, return to the microwave very briefly, or let it stand a few minutes counts down.

Time Features

Defrosting Guide
Food Time Comments
Breads, Cakes
Bread, buns or rolls (1 piece)
Sweet rolls (approx. 12 oz.)
1/4 min.
2 to 4 min.
Rearrange after half of time.
Fish and Seafood Fillets, frozen (1 lb.) 6 to 9 min.
Fruit
Plastic pouch-1 or 2 (10-oz. package)
1 to 5 min.
Meat
Bacon (1 lb.)
Franks (1 lb.)
Ground meat (1 lb.)
Roast: beef, lamb, veal, pork
Steaks, chops and cutlets
2 to 5 min.
2 to 5 min.
4 to 6 min.
9 to 13 min. per lb.
4 to 8 min. per lb.
Place unopened package in oven. Let stand 5 minutes after defrosting.
Place unopened package in oven. Microwave just until franks can be separated. Let stand 5 minutes, if necessary, to complete defrosting.
Turn meat over after first half of time. Use power level 10.
Place unwrapped meat in cooking dish. Turn over after first half of time and shield warm areas with foil. After second half of time, separate pieces with table knife. Let stand to complete defrosting.
Poultry
Chicken, broiler-fryer, cut up (2 V2 to 3 lbs.)
Chicken, whole (2 V2 to 3 lbs.)
Cornish hen
Turkey breast (4 to 6 lbs.)
14 to 20 min.
20 to 25 min.
7 to 13 min. per lb.
3 to 8 min. per lb.
Place wrapped chicken in dish. Unwrap and turn over after first half of time. After the second half of time, separate pieces and place in the cooking dish. Microwave 2 to 4 minutes more, if necessary. Let stand a few minutes to finish defrosting.
Place wrapped chicken in dish. After first half of time, unwrap and turn chicken over. Shield warm areas with foil. To complete defrosting, run cool water in cavity until giblets can be removed.
Place unwrapped hen in oven breast-side-up. Turn over after first half of time. Run cool water in cavity until giblets can be removed.
Place unwrapped breast in microwave-safe dish breast-side-down. After first half of time, turn breast-side-up and shield warm areas with foil. Defrost for second half of time. Let stand 1 to 2 hours in refrigerator to complete defrosting.

USING YOUR OVEN: Sensor Features

Sensor Features
Humidity Sensor
The Sensor Features detect the increasing humidity released during cooking. The oven automatically adjusts the cooking time to various types and amounts of food. Do not use the Sensor Features twice in succession on the same food portion—it may result in severely overcooked or burnt food. Be sure to let the oven cool down for 5-10 minutes before starting the next sensor cook.
If food is undercooked after the countdown, use Cook Time for additional cooking time.

  • The proper containers and covers are essential for best sensor cooking.
  • Always use microwave-safe containers and cover them with lids or vented plastic wrap. Never use tight-sealing plastic covers – they can prevent steam from escaping  and cause food to overcook.
  • Be sure the outside of the cooking container and the inside of the microwave oven are dry before placing food in the oven. Beads of moisture turning into steam can mislead the sensor.

Popcorn Feature
To use the Popcorn feature:

  1. Follow package instructions, using Cook Time if the package is less than 2.0 ounces or larger than 3.5 ounces. Place the package of popcorn in the center of the microwave.
  2. Press POPCORN. The oven starts immediately. Mute  Use only with prepackaged microwave popcorn weighing
    2.0 to 3.5 ounces Melt
    Popcorn
    Use only with prepackaged microwave popcorn weighing 2.0 to 3.5 ounces Melt

If you find that the brand of popcorn you use under pops or overcooks consistently, you can add or subtract 20-30 seconds to the automatic popping time.
To add time:
After pressing POPCORN, press 9 immediately after the oven starts for an extra 20 seconds of the cooking time. Press 9 again to add another 10 seconds (total 30 seconds) of additional time.
To subtract time:
After pressing POPCORN, press 1 immediately after the oven starts for 20 seconds less cooking time. Press 1 again to reduce cooking time another 10 seconds (total 30 seconds) less cooking time.
Beverage Feature
To use the Beverage feature:
The Beverage feature heats 4-16 oz of any beverage.
Press BEVERAGE. The oven starts immediately.
Drinks heated with the Beverage feature may be very hot. Remove the container with care. 

Sensor Features
Reheat

NOTE: Do not use this feature twice in succession on the same food portion – it may result in severely overcooked or burnt food.
The Reheat feature reheats single servings of previously cooked foods or a plate of leftovers.

  1. Place covered food in the oven. Press Reheat.
  2. Press one of the Express Cook pads (from 1 to 4) to select the food you wish to reheat.
    Press Pad Food to Reheat
    1 Plate
    2 Soup
    3 Veggies
    4 Pasta

    3. The oven signals when steam is sensed and the time remaining begins counting down.

  3. Do not open the oven door until the time is counting down.
    If the door is opened, close it and press Start/Pause immediately

After removing food from the oven, stir, if possible, to even out the temperature. If the food is not hot enough, use Cook Time to reheat for more time. Reheated foods may have wide variations in temperature. Some areas may be extremely hot.
If food is not hot enough after the countdown, use Cook Time for additional reheating time.
To Change the Automatic Settings

  • To reduce time by 10%:
    Press 1 after the feature pad.
  • To add 10% to cooking time:
    Press 9 after the feature pad.

Some Foods Not Recommended For Use With Reheat:

  • It is best to use Cook Time for these foods:
  • Bread products.
  • Foods that must be reheated uncovered.
  • Foods that need to be stirred or rotated.
  • Foods calling for a dry look or crisp surface after reheating.

NOTE: Do not use this feature twice in succession on the same food portion – it may result in severely overcooked or burnt food.

  1. Pierce potato skin with a fork and place potato in the oven.
  2. Press Potato. the oven starts immediately.
  3. The oven signals when steam is sensed and the time remaining is counting down. Turn or stir the food if necessary.

Do not open the oven door until time is counting down.
If the door is opened, close it and press Start/Pause immediately.
If food is undercooked after the countdown, use Cook Time for additional cooking time.
To Change the Automatic Settings

  • To reduce time by 10%: Press 1 after the feature pad.
  • To add 10% to cooking time: Press 9 after the feature pad.

USING YOUR OVEN: Other Features
Other Features

Cooking Complete Reminder
To remind you that you have food in the oven, the oven will display “Food is Ready” and beep once a minute until you either open the oven door or press Cancel/Off.
Set Clock
Press to enter the time of day or to check the time of day while microwaving.

  1. Press Set Clock.
  2. Enter time of day.
  3. Press Start or Set Clock.
    To check the time of day while microwaving, press Set Clock.

Child Lock-Out
You may lock the control panel to prevent the microwave from being accidentally started or used by children.
To lock or unlock the controls, press and hold Set Clock for about three seconds. When the control panel is locked, LOCKED will appear in the display.
Display On/Off
To turn the clock display on or off, press and hold Display On/Off button for about 3 seconds. The Display On/Off feature cannot be used while a cooking feature is in use. Timer On/Off
Timer On/Off operates as a minute timer and can be used at any time, even when the oven is operating.

  1.  Press Timer On/Off.
  2. Enter time you want to count down.
  3. Press Timer On/Off to start.

When time is up, the oven will signal. To turn off the timer signal, press Timer On/Off.
NOTE: The timer indicator will be lit while the timer is operating.
Start/Pause
In addition to starting many functions, Start/Pause allows you to stop cooking without opening the door or clearing the display. Press Start/Pause again to restart the oven.  

Steam Clean
Use Steam Clean for easy wiping inside with steam.

  1. Press the Steam Clean button.
  2. Put steam bowl with 1/4 cup of water.
  3.  Press the dial or Start/Pause to start.
  4. After Steam Clean, remove Turntable and Turn Table Support and wipe out inside of oven cavity with paper towel or soft cloth

Turntable
For best cooking results, leave the turntable on. It can be turned off for large dishes. Press TURNTABLE to turn the turntable on or off. Sometimes the turntable can become too hot to touch. Be careful touching the turntable during and after cooking. 

Other Features

USING YOUR OVEN: Other Features 

Vent Fan
The vent fan removes steam and other vapors from surface cooking. Press Vent Fan once for boost fan speed, twice for high fan speed, a third time for medium fan speed, a fourth time for low fan speed, and a fifth time to turn the fan off. 

Surface LightPress Surface Light to turn the surface light on or off.On some models, there is a night light option.
Press Surface Light once for high light, twice for low light, and a third time to turn the light off.Mute
The beeper sound level can be muted.Press Mute On/Off.Automatic Fan
An automatic fan feature protects the microwave from too much heat rising from the cooktop below it. It automatically turns on at low speed if it senses too much heat.
If you have turned the fan on you may find that you cannot turn it off. The fan will automatically turn off when the internal parts are cool. It may stay on for 30 minutes or more after the cooktop and microwave controls are turned off.Clock Mode
You can change clock 12/24 hrs display mode.

  1. Press Settings.
  2. Press Express Cook pad 1.
  3. Select 12hrs/24hrs.
    1 – 12 hrs
    2- 24 hrs

Display Speed
You can change the display speed. 

  1. Press Settings.
  2. Press Express Cook pad 2.
  3. Select new display speed.
    1 – slow
    2 – normal

Sound Level
You can change sound level.

  1. Press Settings.
  2. Press Express Cook pad 3.
  3. Select sound level.
    0 – mute
    1 – low
    2 – normal
    3 – loud

Filter Replace Reminder
The charcoal/grease filter should be replaced when it is noticeably dirty/discolored (usually after 6-12 months, depending on hood usage) or the filter replacement LED is on.
When the Filter Replace LED is turned on, replace the filter and press Reset Filter, and hold for 3 seconds to reset.USING YOUR OVEN  

Microwave terms 

Arcing is the microwave term for sparks in the oven. Arcing is caused by:  

  • the metal shelf is being installed incorrectly and touching the microwave walls.
  • metal or foil touching the side of the oven.
  • foil that is not molded to food (upturned edges act like antennas).
  • metal such as twist-ties, poultry pins, and gold-rimmed dishes.
  • recycled paper towels containing small metal pieces.
  • the turntable ring support being installed incorrectly.

Covering Covers hold in moisture, allow for more even heating and reduce cooking time. Venting plastic wrap or covering with wax paper allows excess steam to escape.
Shielding In a regular oven, you shield chicken breasts or baked foods to prevent over-browning. When microwaving, use small strips of foil to shield thin parts, such as the tips of wings and legs on poultry, which would cook before larger parts.
Standing Time When you cook with regular ovens, foods such as roasts or cakes are allowed to stand to finish cooking or to set. Standing time is especially important in microwave cooking. Note that a microwaved cake is not placed on a cooling rack.
Venting After covering a dish with plastic wrap, you vent the plastic wrap by turning back one corner so excess steam can escape.

Care and Cleaning

Helpful Hints
An occasional thorough wiping with a solution of baking soda and water keeps the inside fresh.
Be sure the power is off before cleaning any part of this oven.How to Clean the Inside
Walls, Floor, Inside Window, Metal and Plastic Parts on the Door
Some spatters can be removed with a paper towel; others may require a damp cloth. Remove greasy spatters with a sudsy cloth, then rinse with a damp cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners or sharp utensils on oven walls.Never use a commercial oven cleaner on any part of your microwave.Removable Turntable and Turntable Support To prevent breakage, do not place the turntable into water just after cooking. Wash it carefully in warm, sudsy water or in the dishwasher. The turntable and support can be broken if dropped. Remember, do not operate the oven in the microwave mode without the turntable and support seated and inplace.How to Clean the Outside
We recommend against using cleaners with ammonia or alcohol, as they can damage the appearance of the microwave oven. If you choose to use a common household cleaner, first apply the cleaner directly to a clean cloth, then wipe the soiled area.
CaseClean the outside of the microwave with a sudsy cloth.
Rinse and then dry. Wipe the window clean with a damp cloth.Control Panel
Wipe with a damp cloth.
Dry thoroughly. Do not use cleaning sprays, large amounts of soap and water, abrasives or sharp objects on the panel—they can damage it. Some paper towels can also scratch the control panel.
Door PanelBefore cleaning the front door panel, make sure you know what type of panel you have. Refer to the eighth digit of the model number. “S” is stainless steel, “L” is CleanSteel and “B”, “W” or “C” are plastic colors.

Stainless Steel (on some models)
The stainless steel panel can be cleaned with Stainless Steel Magic or a similar product using a clean, soft cloth. Apply stainless cleaner carefully to avoid the surrounding plastic parts. Do not use appliance wax, polish, bleach or products containing chlorine on Stainless Steel finishes.
Plastic Color Panels
Use a clean, soft, lightly dampened cloth, then dry thoroughly.
Door Seal
It’s important to keep the area clean where the door seals against the microwave. Use only mild, non-abrasive detergents applied with a clean sponge or soft cloth. Rinse well.
Bottom
Clean  off the grease and dust on the bottom often. Use a solution of warm water and detergent.

Care and Cleaning
Cooktop Light/Nite Light
Replace with a 120 volt, 50 watt (max.) halogen bulb.
See back cover for ordering online at GEAppliances.com.

  1.  To replace the cooktop light/nite light, first disconnect the power at the main fuse or circuit breaker panel, or pull the plug.
  2. Remove the screw from the side of the light compartment cover and lower the cover until it stops.
  3. Be sure the bulb is cool before removing it. Break the adhesive seal by gently unscrewing the bulb.
  4. Screw in the new bulb, then raise the light cover and replace the screw. Connect electrical power to the oven.

Vent Fan
The vent fan has two metal reusable vent filters.
Models that recirculate air back into the room also use a charcoal filter.

Reusable Vent Filters
The metal filters trap grease released by foods on the cooktop. They also prevent flames from foods on the cooktop from damaging the inside of the oven.
For this reason, the filters must always be in place when the hood is used. The vent filters should be cleaned once a month, or as needed.

Removing and Cleaning the Filters
To remove them, slide them to the rear using the tabs. Pull down and out.

To clean the vent filters, soak them and then swish around in hot water and detergent.
Don’t use ammonia or ammonia products because they will darken the metal. Light brushing can be used to remove embedded dirt.
Rinse, shake and let dry before replacing. To replace, slide the filters into the frame slots on the back of each opening. Press up and to the front to lock into place.=
Care and Cleaning
Charcoal Filter
The charcoal filter cannot be cleaned. It must be replaced. See back cover for ordering online at GEAppliances.com.
If the model is not vented to the outside, the air will be recirculated through a disposable charcoal filter that helps remove smoke and odors.
The charcoal filter should be replaced when it is noticeably dirty or discolored (usually after 6 to 12 months, depending on usage). See Optional Kits page 22, for more information.

CHARCOAL FILTER REPLACEMENT

  1. Unplug the microwave oven.
  2. Remove the vent grille mounting screws.
  3. Tip the grille forward, then lift out to remove.
  4. Remove the charcoal filter.
  5. Slide a new charcoal filter into place.
  6. Slide the bottom of the vent grille into place. Push the top until is snaps into place. Replace the mounting screws
  7. Plug in the microwave oven.

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Problem Possible Causes What To Do
Oven will not start A fuse in your home may be blown or the circuit breaker tripped. •Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker.
Power surge. •Unplug the microwave oven, then plug it back in.
Plug not fully inserted into wall outlet. •Make sure the 3-prong plug on the oven is fully inserted into wall outlet.
Door not securely closed. •Open the door and close securely.
Floor of the oven is warm even when the oven has not been used Heat from the cooktop light may make the oven floor get warm. •This is normal.
“LOCKED” appears on display The control has been locked. Press and hold SET CLOCK for about 3 seconds to unlock the control.
You hear an unusual low- tone beep You have tried to start the Reminder without a valid time of day. Start over and enter a valid time of day.
You have tried to change the power level when it is not allowed. •Many of the oven’s features are preset and cannot be changed.
SENSOR ERROR appears on the display When using a Sensor feature, the door was opened before steam could be detected. •Do not open door until steam is sensed and time is shown counting down on the display.
Steam was not detected in a maximum amount of time. •Use Cook Time to heat for more time.
Food amount too large for Sensor Reheat Sensor Reheat is for single servings of recommended foods. •Use Time Cook for large amounts of food.

Things That Are Normal With Your Microwave Oven

  • Steam or vapor escaping from around the door.
  • Light reflection around door or outer case.
  • Dimming oven light and change in the blower sound at power levels other than high.
  • Dull thumping sound while oven is operating.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (U.S.A.)
RADIOFREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment generates and uses ISM frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with limits for ISM Equipment pursuant to part 18 of FCC Rules, which are  designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can  be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following:

  • Reorient the receiving antenna of radio or television.
  • Relocate the Microwave oven with respect to the receiver.
  • Move the microwave oven away from the receiver.
  • Plug the microwave oven into a different outlet so that microwave oven and receiver are on different branch circuits.
    The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference cause by unauthorized modification to this microwave oven. It is the responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

LIMITED WARRANTY

Microwave Oven Limited Warranty

GEAppliances.com
All warranty service is provided by our Factory Service Centers, or an authorized service technician. To schedule service online, visit us at GEAppliances.com/service or call 800.GE.CARES (800.432.2737) during normal business hours.

For the period of GE Appliances will replace
One year From the date of the original
purchase
Any part of the oven which fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship. During this limited one-year warranty, GE Appliances will also provide, free of charge, all labor and related service costs to replace the defective part when the unit is serviced.

What GE Appliances will not cover:

  • Service trips to your home to teach you how to use the product.
  • Improper installation, delivery or maintenance. If you have an installation problem, contact your dealer or installer. You are responsible for providing adequate electrical, exhausting, and other connecting facilities.
  • Failure of the product or damage to the product if it is abused, misused (for example, cavity arcing from wire rack or metal/foil), or used for other than the intended purpose or used commercially.
  • Replacement of house fuses or resetting of circuit breakers.
  • Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, floods or acts of God.
  • Incidental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance. abused, misused (for example, cavity arcing from wire
  • Damage caused after delivery.
  • Product not accessible to provide required service.
  • Service to repair or replace light bulbs, except for LED lamps.
  • Damage to the finish, such as surface rust, tarnish, or small blemishes not reported within 48 hrs of delivery.

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Your sole and exclusive remedy is product repair as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by law.
This limited warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for products purchased for home use within the USA. If the product is located in an area where service by a GE Appliances Authorized Servicer is not available, you may be responsible for a trip charge or you may be required to bring the product to an Authorized GE Appliances Service location for service. In Alaska, the limited warranty excludes the cost of shipping or service calls to your home.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state’s Attorney General. Warrantor: GE Appliances, a Haier company
Louisville KY,40225

Staple your receipt here. Proof of the original purchase
date is needed to obtain service under the warranty.

OPTIONAL KITS

Filler Panel Kits
JX36BWW – White
JX36BBB – Black
JX36BSS – Stainless
JX36BES – Slate
JX36BTS – Black Stainless
JX36BDS – Dark Slate
When replacing a 36” range hood, filler panel kits fill in the additional width to provide a custom built-in appearance.
For installation between cabinets only; not for end-ofcabinet installation. Each kit contains two 3” wide filler  panels.
Recirculating Charcoal Filter Kit
Filter kits are used when the microwave oven cannot be vented to the outside.
15” Cabinet Installation Kit
JX15BUMPBB – Black
JX15BUMPWW – White
For use when installing with 15” depth cabinets.
Available at extra cost from your GE Appliances supplier.
See back cover for ordering online at GEAppliances.com

Notes ……………

CONSUMER SUPPORT

Consumer Support
GE Appliances Website
Have a question or need assistance with your appliance?
Try the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any day of the year!
You can also shop for more great GE Appliances products and take advantage of all our on-line support services designed for your convenience. GEAppliances.com
Register Your Appliance
Register your new appliance on-line at your convenience! Timely product registration will allow for enhanced communication and prompt service under the terms of your warranty, should the need arise. You may also mail in the pre-printed registration card included in the packing material. GEAppliances.com/register
Schedule Service
Expert GE Appliances repair service is only one step away from your door. Get on-line and schedule your service at your convenience any day of the year.
GEAppliances.com/service or call 800.GE.CARES (800.432.2737) during normal business hours.

Parts and Accessories
Individuals qualified to service their own appliances can have parts or accessories sent directly to their homes (VISA, MasterCard and Discover cards are accepted). Order on-line today 24 hours every day.
GEAppliances.com/parts or call 800.432.2737 during normal business hours.
Instructions contained in this manual cover procedures to be performed by any user. Other servicing generally should be referred to qualified service personnel. Caution must be exercised, since improper servicing may cause unsafe operation.
Contact Us
If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from GE Appliances, contact us on our Website with all the details including your phone number, or write to: General Manager, General Manager, Customer Relations | GE Appliances, Appliance Park | Louisville, KY 40225 GEAppliances.com/contact

Printed in China

]]>